Foreword

Marine Ja panese Ind ustrial St andards, the category of Hull fittings, 1995 in English have just been
published. Including all the revisions and re-affirmation as of December , 1995.
Editor's Note:
We are much pleased to pub licize these handbooks which are expected to be available by those
We are deeply grateful to The Nippon Foundation concerned allover the world. Readers are requested to send our Associat ion their opinions and advices
for their generous help toward t he publication of this book. regarding the present publication for the betterment of our future editions .

J APAN MAR INE STAN DA RDS ASSOCIAT ION

Notes

I. The year when established or revised standards is given next to JIS No ., such as JIS F XXXX ­
19XX .

2. Th e title of the standard with ITS Mark 0 indicates the product design ated in aecord anee with
Article 19, the Industrial Standard ization Law in Japan.

3. Translation is not warran teed but correc t, the original text in Japanese are to be evidence.

4. Regarding ns Standards collected in this English version, it has no Annex related to genera!
g uid ance , such as outline of standards conce rne d, objects and/or hi stor ies invol ved , aud
programme of c alculation etc., those which are stated in Japanese version being original text.
When interested in the instruction, you will be kindly requested to inquir e to JMS A without
hesitation.

- 1­
 standardization should be prepared in accordanee with these recommendation as much as
HOW JIS IS LEGISLATED possible.

Establishment of Draft Marine 1IS Preparation System

Policy for the establishment of ,liS 1. The JIS draft is submitted to the responsi­
laPII,. Marineo Standards Asso cta lion
ble minister (to the Minister for Transport Ship own er s
JIS is establi shed on the basis of law as national standards for the product s of manufacruring and in case of the items related to shipbuild­ Shipbuilding co mpa nie s
Marine equipmen t enanura cturer s
mining industries in Japan. The establishment is intended for: ing) . Persons of Ieammg and e xp er re nce
I . Improvement of product quality 2, The. minister in charge then forwards the
2. Improvemeut of production efficieney and rationalization of production draft to the USC for deliberation.
3. Simplified and fair transaction of products 3. JISC includes a special committee which Draft prepaeari on
4 . Rationalization of use or consumption of products consists of at a proper ratio, representa­
Accordingly , for the establishment of individual standards , particulars are determined after mak ing tives from the manufacturers, custom ers,
full studies on how they will be utili zed. Espe eially, in case of the product standard , consideration is distribu tors and neu tral circles so that the
given to the improvement of production efficiency, reduction of mannfacturing cost , improvement of commen ts of all the interested parties may
product quality, economizati on of materials and interchangeability of products or parts . As for the be duly reflected in the deliberation of the
standards covering shipbuilding in dustry , it is regarded essential to give them additionally the draft. Special (technical) aspects of the
international applicability . draft are examined by the special com­
mittee. Con sultation

Procedure for the establishment of JIS 4. As soon as a report is forwarded by" the
president of JTSC on the deliberation of
The present procedure from the preparation of JIS drafts through deliberation to the enactment of the d raft, the responsible minister es­
standards is as illustrated in the chart below. With regard to the standards for shipbuilding, necessary tablishs standardization under JIS. That is
drafts of standards are drawn up by a group consisting of the repres entatives from ship owners , when they are convinced that re commen­
shipbuilding companies and marine equipment manufactures as well as the specialists of learning dation by all the interested parties are
Report
and experience. Further, this group is entrusted by the Ministry of Transport with the drafting of fully reflected in the new standardization
specific standards which the government deems it necessary to establish as national standards. The and that its enactment does not entail
Ministry of Transport refers the drafts of standards thus drawn up to Japanese Iudu strial Standards undue discrimination against those who
Committee (JTSC),an organization established under the law for deliberati on of the particulars of the are under equal conditions.
proposed standards. The committee calls meetings of a divisional council and a technical committee
according to the categories of the proposed standards, deliberates the matter , uecessary amendments, Revision of JIS
and reports the results to the Ministry of Transport who thereby decides ou the euactmeut of JIS and E..s ta b hs h m e n I
The minister in charge should have JISC
aunounces the establishment through the official gazette . The foregoing is a summary of procedure Pubhcanon
examine the validity of JIS thus enacted at least
covering drafting to enactment of JIS . As to what items of the products are to be standardized under
every Five years after institution. The mimister
ITS, plans are made ou the basis of loug or short range prospects , and the drafts of standards are
should take actions when it is found advisable
drawn up accordingl y.
to do so by JISC .

Deliberation of JIS drafts

A committee consisting of the rcprcseutatives from manufacturers, customers aud neutral circles
deliberates the drafts very carefully, especially on the following points:
I. Quality standards of TIS should be determined from the point of valne analysis.
2. Needless to say. the standardization under TIS should conform to the requirements prescribed in
the existing law and regulation s of the government. As regards the items for which provisions
are made in the regulati ons of the major classification societies such as AB, LR, NY, and BV,
the standardization should be determined in conformity with these provisions whenever
possible .
3. Differences in kind, type and description should be reduced to the least possible degree.
4. Con cerning the item s for which standards are recommended by the ISO (International
Organization for Standardization) and the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) , the

-n- -ID­
 deemed necess ary to do so after studying the report . Thus, the manufacturers permitted to use lIS
JIS MARKING SYSTEM
Mark are under the governm en tal strict guid ance and supervision whi ch are intended for the
maintenance of high reliability on the JIS Markin g System .

In the shipbuild ing industry, upon license give n by the government to the applicatio n submitte d
JIS Marking System
with re gard to the ar ticles, pr evi ou sly designated by the g ove rn me nt among liS p ro d uets,
manufacturer s and factories can use the JIS Mark on these articles to indicate being in conformity
with the corresponding JIS. Th is system has been designed to secure and protect the interests not
only of manuf acture rs but also of user s to warrantee the qnali ty of lIS"-marked produc ts unde r
relevant standards with respect of properties, performances and other matters that cannot be judged
by mere appearance of the products. For this purpose, if any manufacturer applies to the government
Asking opinio n
for permission of JIS Marking, the government will send inspector> to the factories of applicants and
has them inspec t strictly the production equipment , chec k-out faciliti es and procedure, quality
control methods and other teehni cal production terms required for the maintenance of product quality Japan Marine Standa rd Association
in accordance with the prescribed inspection proeedure , and a license to use the lIS Mark is granted Ship owners
only when it has been confirmed that the factory in que stion is able to tum out prodncts meeting lfS Shipbuilding companies
not only at present but also in future. If such a license is granted , the government gives public notice Marine equipment manufact ures
Persons of learning and experience
of the names of approved item of the products, licensed manufacturer and approved factory.
This marking system is protected by the law which prescribes punishment on any manufacturer
who has used the JIS Mark on its products with out obtaini ng the governme ntal approval. Thc
diagram shown below illustrates a summary of the marking system. First, the Ministry of Transport GIving advice
consults marine equipm ent manufactur ers, ship owners, ship building companies and experts as to
wha t item s of pr odu cts should be de signated for JIS Marking . Follow ing their advic es or
recommendations and giving consideration to the quantity of production, method of distribution etc.
of the recommended product s, the Ministry of Transport selects items of products which are deemed
suitable for effective lIS Marking, and then refers the designation of selected items to lISe. lISe Con sultation

calls meetings of the shipbuilding committee and the standardization conference to deliberate as to
whether or not the selected produc ts are to bc designated, and reports the result to the Ministry of Japane se Industrial Standard s Commi tt ee

Tran sport. Since the com mittee members resp onsible for the deliberati on are comp osed for
representative s of manufacturers, users and neutral circles, it may be said that a double check system
Repo rt

is prepared on the whole for the designation of products .

If the Ministry of Transpo rt designate s the items of products according to the report of JISe,
manufacturers o f the designated products may use JIS Mark on their produets after obtaining a
governmental permi ssion . As mentioned abov e, however , this perm ission is subjec t to a strict
inspection by the governm ent. Therefore, the manufaeturer s permitted to use JIS Mark are really the
excellent makers maintaining a high level of intracompany standard ization and quality co ntrol, Designation of JIS·ma rked products

being responsible for satisfying the requireme nts that the designated products turned out at their Publication

factories should meet the quality specifie d under JIS.

As of November 1995, 46 items are designated as JIS-marked product s, 140 standards being
concerned and 70 manufacturers are permitted to produce them. These permitted manufacturer s are
obliged to submit an annual report in the prescribed form to the government concerning technical
terms o f produ ction equipmen t and che ck-out fa cilities, and the qu ality control in production Note : Acco rding 10 The Standard Code at Toky o Round o f GAIT, Japanese Industrial Standardization Law ha~ been Ic vi~ed
o n April 25 th) 980 and it was available fo r not only product s made. Ul Japan , but also products of foreign couru n es.
proeesses of the designated produ cts as well as the annual production , the ratio of JIS-marked
So goo ds and/or produ cts wtth J1S~rn.ar'k.s assured by Japanese government (Co mpetent Minl:stry) might be sold In
products to the Whole products and the method of lIS Marking . The submission of this report enables Japan since today in accordance with Japanese Law con cerned .
not only the reporters themselves to have an objective knowledge of their own technica l prodnction
terms but also the government to obtain necessary data for such guidan ce and supervision of
permitted manufacturers as co nducti ng on-the-spot inspeetion of produ ction equipment if it is

- Y­
- IY ­
 INDEX
STANDARD NO. TITLE PAGE
(JIS F)
STANDARD NO. TITLE PAGE
(JIS F) 2010-82 Ships' Rope Hole Covers 163

0050·78 Graphical Symbols for Ships' Ventilation System I

2014-87 Fairleads 167

0051-83 Symbols for Lifesaving Appliance and Fire Fighting of Ships 5

2015-87 Cast Steel Bar Type Chain Cable Stoppers 182

0101-94 Yacht - Application of wire ropese :................................................ 21

2016-87 Cast Steel Pawl Type Chain Cable Stoppers for Grade 2 Chain Cable 186

0201-83 General Rules for Automatic Drawing of Basic Hull Construction Plans 24
2017-82 Panama Chocks..· · ·· · · · ·..· · ·..· 191

0301-90 Schemes of Thermal Insulation of Piping for Small.Ships 45

2018-76 Bollards (Simple Type) ·..· · · · · · · 196

0302-77 Standard Practices for Thermal Insulation Work for

2019-79 Small Size Cast Iron Deck End Rollers 198

Small Ships' Airconditioning Ducts 48

2020-79 Small Size Steel Plate Deck End Rollers 202

0303-92 Ships made of fibreglass rainforced plastics - Design of earth- ·..·..· 51

2021-76 Small Size Fairleads 206

0507-79 Application Standard of Steel Pipes for Small Ships 56

2022-90 Ships' Horizo ntal Rollers 215

0809-91 Ships steering gear - Test method at sea trial ·..· ·..· · · · · · 60
2023-76 Ships' Small Size Cast Steel Bar Type Anchor Chain Cable Stoppers 218

0905-81 Measurement of Noise Level on Board Vessels (Accommodation Part) 67

2024-75 Ships' Small Size Stand Rollers 221

0907-90 Guidelines for Overall Evaluation of Vibration in Accomodation Part of

2025-92 Ships - Cable clenches 225

Merchant Ships 74
2026-80 Fairleads with Horizontal Rollers 233

1010-84 Yacht' s Hom Cleats 77

2027-S7 Roller Pawl Type Chain Cable Stoppers for Grade 2 Chain Cable 239

10] 1-84 Yacht' s Fairleads 79

2028-87 Rollers Bar Type Chain Cable Stoppers for Grade 2 Chain Cable 248

1012-84 Yacht' s Cross Bitts 81

2029-78 Ships' Towing and Mooring Brackets 254

1013-87 Yacht's Rigging Screws 83

2030-78 Single Point Mooring Pipes 256

1014-87 Yacht' s Shackles :.................................................................................. 89

2031-87 Cast Steel Pawl Type Chain Cable Stoppers for Grade 3 Chain Cable 259

1015-87 Yacht's U . Type Bow Eyes 93

2032-87 Roller Pawl Type Chain Cable Stoppers for Grade 3 Chain Cable : 264

1016·89 Yacht' s Thimbles 96

2033-87 Roller Bar Type Chain Cable Stoppers for Grade 3 Chain Cable 173

1017· 89 Yacht' s Ring Plates :..................................... 98

2051-76 Double Type Cross Bitts for Tug Boat 280

1018-89 Yacht' s Eye Plates 100

2052--87 Recess Type Tug Bitts 282

1019-91 Yacht's air vents 102

2103-87 Ships' Davits for General Use 285

1020-92 Small craft - Anchor Chains 103

2104-87 Ships' Cranes for General'Use 292

1021-92 Yacht's life line 106

2105-90 Ships' Cargo Hooks 296

1022-92 Yacht's stanchion 108

2106-88 Ships' Chains for General Use 305

]023· 94 Yacht's - sheaves 110

2107-90 Ships' Topping Units - 309

1024-94 Small craft - Hand powered hydraulic steering systems 113

2201-90 Ships' Derrick Booms .-.. 318

1201-87 Small Ships' Rudder Carriers 124

2202-90 Ships' Derrick Topping Brackets 334

2001-90 Bollards ..· ·..·..· · · ··..· ·· · ·..·..·..··· ·..· l 38

2203-90 Ships' Derrick Gooseneck Brackets 339

2002-76 Cast Iron Bar Type Chain Cable Stoppers 142

2205-87 Boom Rest Head Pieces 346

2003-90 Casr Iron Deck End Rollers 146

2206-76 Ships' Light Load Derrick Topping Brackets 350

2004-90 Steel Plate Deck End Rollers 150

2207-76 Ships' Light Load Derrick Gooseneck Brackets -352

2005-75 Closed Chocks 154

2251-90 Ships' Light Load Derrick Booms 356

2006-76 Open Chocks 157

2304-89 Ships' Manholes 361

2007-76 Mooriug Pipes 160

- VI­ - VII­
 STANDARD NO. TITLE PAGE STANDARD NO. TITLE PAGE
(JIS F) (JIS F)
2305-83 Ships ' Non - watertight Steel Doors 365 2615-82 Pilot Ladders 643
2312-93 Ships' butterfly nuts 369 Embarkat ion Ladders :.. 649
2617-89
2314- 90 Watertight Slidi ng Doors 374 2621-85 Acco mmodation Ladders . 653
2315-68 Indicators for Watertight Sliding Doors : 391 2622-85 Pilot Accommodation Ladders 658
2316-87 Fittings for Weathertighr Steel Doors 393 2623-90 Wharf Ladders for Small Ships 662
2317-92 Ships ' ullage holes ..· · ·..· · 398
2702-76 Mouth Pieces for Voice Tube · · ·..·..·..·..· ·..·..· ·..· 668
2318-84 Ships' Steel Weathertight Doors 402 2704- 67 Fitrings for Steam Whi stle . 678
2320-78 Ships' Oiltigh t Hatch Covers -..· ·..·..· 4 10 2804 ·76 Ships' Cross Bins 681
2321-84 Ships ' Steel Small Hatch Covers 421 <I) 2902-81 Ships' Punkah - Louvres 684
2322-87 Fittings of Ships ' Steel Small Hatch Covers ·..· ·..· · · 429 3001-80 Hinged Caps of Sounding Pipes 687
2323 -82 Ships' Ratchet Spanners 436 3002-82 Deck Pieces for Sound ing Pipes 69 1
2329 -75 Ships ' Small Size Manholes 440 3005- 82 Ships' Bottom Plugs and the Spanners · · · · · · · 695
2330- 80 Fittings for Small Ships ' Weathertight Steel Doors · · ·..·..·..· · 442 3006 -77 Ships' Drain Plugs 700
2331-91 Covers for tank cleaning holes 449 3008-77 Deck and Bulkhead Pieces for Transmission Shaft 707
2332-91 Weathertight steel doors for small ships 451 3009- 87 Ships' 5 K and 10 K Deck and Bulkhead Pieces for Pipe Connection ..·..· · 712
2333-91 Non - weathertight steel doors for small ships 461 3013-76 Scupper Fittings for Ships' Refrigerating Chambers 7 15
2335-88 Ships' Weather Hollow Doors : 465 3015-77 Gra tings for Ships' Scupper Pipes -......" '''''''' '' '''''''' ''' '' '' '''' '''''' '' ''' '' ''' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' '' ''' 7 17
o 2401-90 Ships' Bronze Side Scunl cs 470 3016-90 .Ship s' Cas t Iron Pipe Sleeve Type Expan sion Joints 725
2<W4-75 Ships ' Non - opening Side Scu ttles 502 3017-90 Ships' Cast Steel Pipe Sleeve Type Expans ion Joints " 729
2406 -76 Deck Lights 507 Self Closing Parallel Cock Heads for Short Sounding Pipe 733
3018-90
2407-87 M ushroom Ventilators 510
3019-90 Self - closing Ga te Valve Heads for Short Sonndin g Pipe 739
2408-91 Gooseneck ventilators 527 3020-85 Ships' Oil Suction Bellmouths 743
2410-78 Toughened Glasses for Ships' Side Scuttle s 533 3021- 68 Ships' Steel Pipe Bands 747
C1 2413-90 Ships' Alumininm Alloy Side Scuttles · ··· · · · 538 3022-78 Ships' Steel Pipe U - Bolts 750
2416- 82 Ships' Flame Arreste rs 555 3024-78 Ships ' Deck Stands for Controlling Valves 75 3
2421- 90 Extruded Aluminium Alloy Sqnare Windows for Ships 560 3025-90 Remote Handling Fittings for Valves on Small Ships' Forepeak Bulkhead 767
2422--88 Ships' Fire Dampers 569 Remote Handling Fittings for Valves in Small Ship s' Cargo Oil Tank· · · · · 778
3026 -90
2601- 83 Ships' Dog Steps 574 Ships' Deck and Bulkhead Pieces for Small Size Coppe r Tube s 79 \
3027-72
2602- 87 Ships' Steel Vertical Ladders 577
3056-90 Ships' Foot Valves 79 3
2603-70 Steel Deck Ladde rs 579 797
3057·90 Bronze Vertical Storm Valves « •

2605-90 Small Size Steel Accommodation Ladders 589 3058- 90 Cast Steel Vertical Storm Valves 80 1
2606-58 Ships' Wooden Handrails 607 3059-90 Bronze Screwdown Vertical Storm Valves 805
2607-94 Shipbuilding - Cargo ships - Guardr ails 608 Cast Steel Screwdown Vertical Storm Valves 8 10
3060-90
2612-90 Steel Wharf Ladders 6 15
0 3301-90 Anchors . 8 15
2613-90 Aluminium Alloy Wharf Ladders 630
C1 3303-93 Flash butt welded anchor chain cables .. 829
2614-67 Bulwark Ladde rs 638
3306-90 Buoy Shackles .. 838

- VIII ­ -lX ­
 STANDARD NO, TITLE PAGE STANDARD NO. TITLE PAGE
(JIS F) (JIS F)
3307-78 Anchor Stoppers
844 3992-81
Dredger' s Sheaves for General Use ·..·1004

3308-77 Anchor Buoys

850 3993-77
Dredger ' s Delivery Pipes ·······..·..··················1007

3310-90 Anchor Stoppers (Small Size)

853 3994-79
Dredger's Floaters )010

o 3403-90 Rigging Screw : 857 3995-9l

Rubber sleeves for dredges discharge pipes · 10 14

3406-90 Chain Stoppers 86 1 6708-79

Ships' Cargo Winches ····· ·········· ··..····1019

3410-90 Ships' Eye Plates 863 6709-85

Mooring Winches " ······1023

3412-90 Ships' Ring Plates 867 6714-83

Windlasses 1029

3413-90 Sunken Link Plates " 870

6720-90
Shop Test Method for Ships' Hydraulic Steering Gears ..···········..·· ··················"" "" 1034
3414-89 Ships' Hom Cleats 872
6721-90
Shop Test Method for Oil Pressure Pumps at Hydraulic
3415-74 Ships' Wire Rope Stay Eye Plates 875
Steering Gears for Ships ·· · · ··1037
3416-90 Guy Cleats for Ships 877

3418-76 Ships' Block Sheaves , 880

(I) 3419-90 Ships' Steel Guy Blocks with Swivels for Fibre Rope 883

G~ 3421-89 Ships' Steel Cargo Blocks 891

G~ 3422-90 Ships' Snatch Blocks 909

o 3425-68 Ships'S teel Blocks for Signal Flags 9 16

(-') 3426-90 Ships' Internal - Bound Blocks 9.18

(-') 3428-95 Ships' cast steel cargo blocks with roller bearings 93 1

(-') 3429-95 Ships' steel plate cargo blocks with roller bearings 939

3430-80 Ships' Wire Reels 947

3432-90 Ships' Steel Wire Sockets 950

3433-83 Application of Wire Ropes in Ship ..··..··················· ·· 954

3434-83 Application of Fibre Ropes in Ship 956

3435-90 Ships' Wire Nippers for Topping Lifts 959

3436-80 Ships' Small Size Wire Reels 969

3439-69 Fastening Method of Wire Ropes to Drum for Marine Use 973

3440-80 Applieation of Ships' Canvas 975

3442-90 Ships' Small Sire Wire Nippers for Topping Lift 976

3443-90 Ships' Small Size Steel Blocks ·..···································..·········· 98 1

3612-90 Rope Ladders

985

3613-82 Ships' Clinometers

989

3905-94 Ships - Toggle pins

99 1

3906-87 Ships' Chainlets

994

3907-87 Ships'S Rings of Chainlet

995

3908-87 Ships' Eye Plates for Chainlet

996

3991-75 Dredger' s Anchors

997

-X­ -XI ­
 JIS

F 0050· 1978

Graphical Symb ols for Ships' Ven tila tion Syst em

1. Scope
This Japanese Indus trial Stan dard specifi es graphical symbo ls to be used mainly for ships' ventilation system
plans, hereinafter referred to as " symbols" . ­

2. Classificatio n
T he sym bols shall be classified as follows:
(1) DUCI and conne ction
(2) Duct fitti ng
(3) Ventilator
(4) Mechanical fan

3. Symbol
The symbols shan -be as givn in Tab les I to 4 . T he size of symb ols may be changed freely, but they shall be
drawn, as far as possible, propo rtiona l to the specifi ed shapes, clearly and in easily visible sizes.
Reference: The symbols marked wit h • are identi cal t o tho se specified in ISO/DP 556 9.

Table I Duet and Connection

No, Name Symbo l RC012.rks

· (I ) Wbfle t1 is necessary to d istinguish

duet tines n _ _ _ _ H ,' '' _ _ _ I t • etc.
may be nsed appro priately.
1.1 DUC l

-'
(2 ) Indica tio n of direct ion or flow :

·
-­
1-
The symbol " _ _ " or • +" may

1.2
Crossing duct no r
connected
+ be used, I

· Example: T con necti on

1.3 Cr o5 ~ ing duct co nnected

+ T

·
1.4 Flexible duct
~
'I

Reference Sta ndards:

JIS F 7006 Graphical Symbols for Marine Piping Systems
ISO/ DP 55 69 Conventional sings to be used in schemes for t he installations of pipeline and ventilation
systems

-1­
 F 0050 -1978
F 0050- 1978

Table 2 Duct Fittin gs

-
T aMe 3 Ventilator
--
No. Name Sy mbo l
I
Rema rks No. Name
I Symbo l Remarks

2. 1 . Volume d ampe r
-+-
I
I

I 3, I
Cowl head vent llato r
JgLt-----
Ql
2.2 Shut -off damper
I
I
--+­ I
I
I
_. -. ­
3.2 Will vent ilator r;;J
-
I
2.3 Pire damper (man ual)
I --+- i 3.3 Wall vent ilator wit h
Q For intern ally controlled type, the symbol
closing d evice
¥ may be used .

2.4 File damper

(a utoma tic)
I
I
-t- ,!
I
3.4 Mu shro om ven tilator
IT @
',-
I
I --
2.5 Non ret urn nap
-N­
-1:~
3.5 Mu shroom venti lator
wi th clo sing de vice
IL ®
I

r
2.6 Orifice Jl 3 F 7006

3.6 Gooseneck ventilator

I 0--

*
2.7 Silencer [D] I
I
~ I
I
3.7 Goose neck venti lator
with closmg device
0--0
I
2 ,8 All inle t or ill To d istinguish bet w een air mler and
ou tle t EE o ut le t, all arrow m3Y be used.

OUl~
Exam ple :

~
Ye ntilatcr with lou vre To indic ate the direction of {low , the.
3.8
sy mbo l ~ may be used .

2.9 Gr ill --CJ

2.10 Punk ah louver

-0
iI 3.9 Louver ventila to r with
clos ing devi ce ~
--- I -- ._ ­
2.11 Diff user ---{g To shew ro und type, use ,. ---{g»'.

-2­ - 3­
 ns
F 0050 -197 8
FOOS 1- 19 8 3
T abl er 4 Mechanical Fan

No. Name Symbol Remarks Symb ols for

Lifesaving Applian ce and F ire Fi ghting of Ships
~

4 .1 Centrifugal supply fan

W- 1. Scope

This Japa nese In du strial S iand ard specifie s sym bo ls to be used fo r lifesaving applianc e pl ans and lire co n tro l
I
plans for ships.
~
4.2 Cen trif ugal exhau st (a11
II -@J 2. Classifica tion

The sym b ols shall be classified as follows:

4.3 Axial supply fan
I
I
~

tBt (1) For life saving A pplia nce Plans

(a ) Lifesaving apparatu s

*
fo r dual purpose type , use. (b) SIgnalling equi pme n t

I iRj
~
4 .4 Axial exhaust fan (2) F or F ire Contro l Plan s
(a) F ire fighting equipme n t and flee doors in p ro tec ted area
(b) Fir e doors and emergency ex it s
(c) Fi re pu mp s
4 .5 Wall type propeller fan
-8 (d ) Ho se boxes
(e) Fire hy d rants, lire rnam valves, co nnec ti ng flanges an d n ozzles
(f) Fir e dampers for ven tilati on due ls
(g) Remot e co utrol statio n
(h) Fire dete ction system and alarm syst em
(i) Sta tion for d lstribu ting fire ex unguishers
(j) In ert gas
(k) Fire extinguishers
(I) Con tainers for fire ex ti nguishing system
(m) Locker fa! fire Iightm g equ ipment
(n) Fireman 'S outfi t

3. Symbols

Th e symbols shall be as follow s and , as a ru le. be coloured .

T he size of sym bol s may be cha nged freely, but th ey sha ll be drawn. as far as po ssible , pr oportiona l
to the spec ifi ed sha pes, clearly and In easily visible size .

( 1) Fo r Lifesaving App liance Plan '

(a) Lifesaving appara t us

No. Name Symb ol

1.2 Em ergen cy 0 0:1.1

- - - -­ - - - - --'--­ - - - - - ' - - - - - - -- --­ -­ -

-4- -5­
F 005 1· 1983 F OOS ] · )lJ:i .l

No Name Symbol Remarks No . Name Symbo l Remarks

l-n tlJI..t blc- lifcr(lt't 1 13 Box with lifejac ket

Rt(!id lifcrnft
,villi J hf chn c
D I 14 Lrf'ecapsule

I5 1.1.5 Bo at deck light

L uc buoy
1.6 1.16 Embarkation ladder
wrth J buoyant h tclm c

1,7 Lucbuoy 1 17 Emba rkati on hfcnet

W \ t{ J J ~ ~ l f - l 12' n ll i n,g h)!ht

Lifeb uo y wu h J
18 -clf-igniring hght (b) Signalling equipment
Jod:; b UO ~~1 n t lil vh nc
No Name Symbol

For a group rcprc scma uon of 2 1

19 Bu oy a n t "'P P ~H ;H U S 2. 1 Scl f-rgm nn g IJgIH. 2.'; Sclf -ac tiva t tn g
sm o ke srgnal a nd 2 4 Pa rach u tc vignal

Lifebuoy with a
~ .;,..IC·IJ;nltmghg h t
I 10 .md ..t vctf-acuvaune 2.2 Selfvigtu un g hg h t
'ilt'lo Jc~ ' I~m.:l ' -

III
Sel f'-acuva tin g
2 .3
smoke signal

Lru c-t h ro wrug

1.12 2.4 Parachu te slgna l
<Jpp hJ1K~'

- 6- -7 ­
F 0051 ·1 983 F 0051 · 1'IXJ

No . Name Sy mb ol Remark s Nu. Nam e Sy m bo l Re m ark s

by p owder ty pe
2.5 Rock et signa l .3 s exu ngursbmg system

C~~t~~~~:~~ ~r f------- - -- - - + - - -- - - - -+--- - -- - - - -- - ­

2.6
Portable radio
appar atu s for
sur vival cr af t
3.9 by in en gas sy stem
c~

(2) For File Contr ol Plans

3 .10 A Classdm sron
(a) Fire fighting equipmen t and fire doors in protected area A60. A30. A IS. AO. 8 15 and 8 0
spec ified in Pa ri II . Chap tcr 2 o f the
Intern a tio nal Convention fo r the
Name SYmb ol Remarks
Safe tv of Life at SC ~ , 19 14 ..hull 10('
ref e:u"ed to .

3 IJ B Class Divisio n
by wat er
3.1 drench er type
cxn ngu ishi ng
syste m

(b) File doors and emergency exits

by wa ter
spnnkle r type
ex u nguisht ng No. Name Symbo l Re mark"
system

by wat er
4 I Hinge d A Class Hre d oor ee,I
rmst type
33 ex ringu rsht ng
system

Com par tmenr Or by s team type

4 .2 Hinged B Class fire doo r
,4
area protected ex tinguis hi ng sys te m

43 Sh dlng A Class (ire do or

-, I
when the cla.... of the [HI.: protccucn
by fo am ty pe wall 10 which Jm ..• d c o rv an...II ttcd
3.5 extingu ishing syste m a nd the class of the fire door" In:
different. the :I<.l~:- 01 th c fire doo r'
sha ll be suffrxc d to the vym bol

44 Sliding B Class fir e door =1 I

3.6

I
b y hal ogen bas ed
4.5 Hin ged A Class loc ally self-closut g fire doo r
<1 I
vapo uris mg liqu id
ext inguish ing syst em

4 .6 Hin ge d A'Class remo tely clo sed n rc doo r

fl
-8 - - 9­
 F 0051 · 198 3 I' 005 1· J'IH.l

No. Name Symbo l Rem arks No. Nam e Rem ark s

-
4.7

Sliding fire do or
A Class self-clos ing

-= I 5.2 Emergency fire pu mp

4.3 A Class remo tely closed

== \l
No
(d) Hose boxes

Nam e Sy mbo l Rema rks

4 .9 D C!..<l :fS sclf-closmg <;) 6 1 Do x with hy dran ( valve

\ When the class of the fi re prot ecu cn

wa1.l to which [ Ir e door s arc fitte d
- Hinged Ii rc door a n d the ~~ o f th e Fire do o rs.are
differen t, the ctoss of the fire doors

4 10 B Class re mo tely close d

/ \
1
<l: haU be sut flxrd 10 the symbol
6 .2 BQX wi th nrc hose
\l

4. 1J B Cl a ~ ~ self-closing -;.. (e) Fire hydran ts, fire main valves, connectin g flanges an d nozzles

No. Nam e Sy mb ol

- Shdmg lire:d O<H

for water ~y'pc:

4 12 B Class remotely d osed -----=i I 7J ex t in guishi n g plant
\l
, Hydran r valve

fo r roam t ype
4 l-3 Lmcrgency ~XH
7.2 exnngutshm g pl an t

for wa ter type

73 cxt mgu ssht ng p lan I
~ . 14 Direc tio n or evac u ation

fo r stea m ry pe
(c) Fire pumps 7A cx un guishmg plant

No. Name Symbol Re m arks

shutoff valve

for loam t yp e
5 J r.s ex l ing\m.h in ~ plan t

fo r CO ~ typ e
7.6 cx nngulslun g p lan t

-10- -11 ­
 F 00$ ) · 1983 F 00$1 · In:l

No Name Sy m bol Remarks Name Symbo l Remarks

i 7 Sbutoff valve fOI hal oge n type j . 11 Foam type ex nn guish mg gun
ext mguuhmg plant

i 8 OJ)' PQWd:1 ou tle t 7.18 Powder typ e eX lHl~u ish Jng gun

Internauonal shore COIlO eCI JOn Oange fot (I) Fire damp ers fo r ventilation ducts
7.9 w at er ty pe cx u ngu rsbmg pla[Jt

No. Name Sy mbol Remarks

1 10
Short co nnec t ion Fl ange for Steam ty pe
ex tingntshmg plant
8.1 Shu toffs fo r autom ati cally co ntro lled ven ulano n
[EJ]
7.11 Shore cc nncc ucu Ilange for CO 2 type
ex ung uishing pla n [
8.2 Shu to ffs for man u ally ope ra te d -ve ntila uo n

~
(g) Remote contr ol sta tion
For wa ter
7.\2 cxnngu.sbing plant
No . Name Symbol Rcrnarkv

Sh ore connection 9. 1
j 13 valvc wu h re. co, SI3Jtm g of fire pum ps
couph ng
e xn ngursbmg ptant

9.2 Slopp ing of fu el 0 ,1 pum ps.

7.14 for Steam
c.x.t i n gu l~ h mg plant

Remote control
9.3 siauo n fOI sea Inlet vafb es fo r fire pum ps
i .15 wa te r ty pe extingu ish ing gu n
<:»>
94 clo sing of fue l valve:'.
7 16 w ater o r foam type cx tingurshlng ,gun

steam ty pe ex tlnguishm g
9..5 plan t valves

- 12- -13 ­
 I 011", I I"
F 0051-1 983

No Name Symbol Remar ks No Name Sym bol Rcm:uh

I
&
cen tr al SlOp pmg of all
ope nin g of SIC3.m bo iler 9.16
9.6 vcnnla u c n fans
safety valves

97
starting of foam
ex tm gtnsh mg plan t
9. 17 clcsuig of funnel shu tter s g
FS
-

9.8
star ung orco z
exuugurshi ng plant
9.18
Remo te co ntrol
stat ion fo r
closing o r sk ylights
~
SK
-

99
star ting of trust type
cxung nishing p lan:
9.19 do ors
& I
-

st art ing of drencher and ln crt g.:a-: type p ro tec n on

~ 1

I
9.10 wat er cu rt ain plant 9.20 t1)an 1 valves

Remo te co iu rol
stau on for

halogen ty pe (h) Fire detecrion system and alarm system

911 cXl; ngu i:!lh u18 p lan t valve
No Name Sym bol Remark...

9. 12
po wder type
ex tmg u ish mg pt ~n t valve
10 .1 Aud io-visual aut ern a ue n rc alarm cen tral panel
[0]
I

9.13
slopping of accomm odauo n
ven tilat io n fan & A
10 2
Area controlled by aut o ma u c stgnals for ..make
det ec un g system
GJ -- .
I
MJ l' Ill' uvcd ,I .. de tc...· LtlJ

9.14
sto p ping of engine ro o m
veuulauon fan & E
10 3 Area co nt rolled by gas dc tcc n ng "y..tern
0
9 .15
sto pping of cargo hold
vcnnl au o n fan & H
lOA Fife alarm push-bu n on [!] i,

-14 ­ - 15 ­
F OOS I · 1983 I' 011. ..1 l 'Ui '

No Nil mc Sy mbol Remarks No. Name Sym bol

105 G en e ral a la n u pu sh-b uuon

(!) IU (03m type ex tinguishing plan t TIle type 01 roam ..J1:111 be note d e n
the plan

106 A la rm wanu ng dcv wc-CO:2

IT 11.6

Distnbu t tcn
syst em fOT
COl type e xnngurshmg plant

~
~,:~...~.
halogen based vapo un slng
10 7 A la rm \\'.Ul1I11t; de vice -halogen 1 1.7 hqurd exungurs hmg pla nt

A I;jTl llln~

~
10 8 device for lire dod general ala rm po wde r type
II 8 ex tingulslung plan t

10.9 ShIp '.. bell

Q No.
(j) Inert gas

Nam e Sym bol Remarks

No
(i) Sta tion for distri bnring rife extinguisher>;

Symbol Remarks
12 I Inert gas Iire p rotecuc n plan!
I

i ~
w ater-drcnchc r/spnn klcr (k) Fire extinguishers

I II
ty pe exti ngui shing pla nt
No. Name
Sy mbo l Remark-

auro mat tcally sta rt ed 13.1 DIY p ow der type

I II wat cr-cpnnklc r type
C X I H1 g u L ~ hi n ~ plant

D I ~ rTl b \.JI I l) 1l
-y-tcm For

au rom a ucallv sta r te d mist 13.2 f oam ty pe

11 j
typ e e x tllli ui\ lllng.pl ant

Po rt a ble rue
ex nn gutsher

steam type
11 4 c'i.llnJ;.lJJ~hIOg. pl.!nl 133

\ 34 Halogen typ e

-16- - 17­
 F005 1. 19B3 1'005 1·1983

No Name Remarks Sy mbo l Rema rk s

~ o. Name

13.5 Po r ta ble Itrc

cx ung urshcr 13 lS Wa ter frre hose with Jet noz zle

! 36 Dry power typ e t:L )6 Wat er Fire ho se with fog noz zle

13.7

DS Transpo rt able
lire extmgursher
F O :lJJl type

• 13 17 w a ter fir e hose with fog and jet nozzle

13.9 Halogen ty pe
13. 19 F oa m Irrc hose wnh n no zz le

13. 10 Wa ter typ e (I) Cont ainers for fire ex tinguishing sy stem

Name Sym bol Remarks

13 .1 1 Au tom a uc ,p TJyiog Hqutd Inc c x ttng urshc r 14 ! Pneurna uc wa ter lan k for s pri n kler system

IJ 12

l3 13
COJ nczxlc

F oam no zzle

-..
14 2

14 3
Con tain er o f foamtng medi a

CO l bo t tle
- T
Th e vo lum e vhall be su ffixe d to the
sym bol or not ed on th e plan.

The n um ber 'OfCO ~ bo ttle" may be

suffi xe d 10 t he symbol a- nc ccxs.rry

*
l3.1 4 Spnn klcr For __ prutklcr :SY'i [L,'m 14 .4 San dbox wit h J shovel

-18­ -19­
 115
FOIOI- 1994

F 0051. 1983
Yacht - Ap plic ati on of wire r op es
(m) Locker for fire fighting equipment
1. Scope This Japanese Industrial Standard specifies the application standard of stainless steel wire ropes
Name Sym bol Remarks used for hull outfitting of yachts as marine leisure with a length of 12 m or less (hereinafter referred 10 as
" wire rope") on the basis of the rope diameters specified in JI S G 3540.
Remark: Thi s standard makes reference to the following standards:
15. 1 JIS F 0044 - Pleasure boats-Vocabulary-Rigs
JIS G 3540 - Wire ropes for mechanical control

2. T ype and com positio n Types and compositions shall be as given in Table 1.

(n) Fireman's outfit Table 1 Typ es a nd compos ition of wir e rope s

Type. A B C
No. Remarks
Composition Onestrand of Six strands of SIXstrands of
19 wires 7 WIres. with 19 wireS. with
common co re common core
i6 I Scn-ccma mcd brcat tnug apparatus 7 x7 7 x 19
Symbol I x 19
Section

e• •
\6 2 I rcsh .lIT pressure hose apparatus

!6 , S ,H ~ t Y lamp

16 4 Llcrmc dn ltlllg macli lnc

3. Application s ta nda rds The applica tion standards of wire ropes for uses shall be as given in Table 2.

-20 ­ -2 1 ­
FOIOI · 1994 t UIUI 1'1"1

Tab le 2 Application standa rds of wire rope s for uses

Application D iame ter of wire rope (rom)
2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
Standing rigging Fore Stay A A,B , C A,B A A A A
Side Slay A A, B, C A
Back stay A A A A A A
Inner fore Stay A A A A A A
Upper shroud A A A A
Lower shroud A A A A
Runningrigging Running backstay A A A A A
Halyard S. C B. C C C C C C
Boom vang C B, C B
Clew out fall C C c C C
Rem arks r 1. Althou gh no req uirement s are speci f ied In j lS G 3540 (or WJfC ropes wrrh 1 di ameter or nOI Jess Lh.an 7.0 mm , they were.
selected in consideration of their avai lability J.nthe market,
2. Termsanddefinitions showing the installauon locationsof wire ropesarc in accordancewith l IS F 0044, some adltilional
terms and their detirrtdons 3.re shown in Fig. 1.

Clew Ou [ fall /

Terms Definitions
Standing rigging Fore stay A stay supporting the mast from fore side
Side stay Stay, stretching from the mast to both sides (used for dinghy)
Backstay A Stay supporting <he mast from aft side
. Inner fore stay A Slay for mast bend adjustment
Upper shroud Upper Slays supporting the mas, in the transverse direction
Lower shroud Lower stays supporting the mast. in me transverse direcdoo
Running rigging Running backstay . Adjustable stays. one each for each side
Halyard Wues for liitingllowering salls
Bocm vang Wires for adjusting bocm heights or supporting the boom
Clew out fall A rope for pulling the clew of the sail aflward

Fig. 1 Term s and definitions of wire rope applications

- 22­ - 23 -
 ns
F 020) · 1983 F 020 1-1983 F 020] · 1983
General Rules for Au tomatic Drawing of Basic Hull Constructi on Plans

3 .2 Orie ntation o f bull On th e drawing and specifi cati on o f drawing bo ard

1. Scope
3 .2.1 The dir ecti on o f hull shall be orien ted so that the bow be pl aced on th e right side and ste rn on the
T his J apanese Industrial S tand ard specifies the general req uirements for eomputer-arded automa tic drawing lef t , on th e dra win g shee t {e.g. , plan , side view, shell ex pans io n, c tc.) ,
of basic hull constru c tion plan s(l ) o f ships. Designation s and sym bols Cor strakes, seams and but t joints, and
3 .2 .2 The draw ing shall, as a rule , be so as to represent port side half of hull. .
numberin g fo r frames and girder s are specified in the ANNEX.
Th e d rawing of th o se peculi ar to starb oard side, if necessary, m ay be part ly sho wn o n th e sta rbo ard dr awin g sheet
No te (l ) : Basic hull construction plans specified in tills standard cover the following plan s. (e .g., plan , side view, cro ss sec tio nal vie w, shell ex pan sion , e tc.).
(I) MidshIp section
(2) Bulkhead co nstru ctio n Remark : Typical ex amples o f drawing are sho wn in Ref erence P igure ,
(3) Lo ngi tudinal profil e
(4) Deck construc tion plan
(S) Beam, pillar and under-deck longitudin al girder construct ion plan 4. Prese n 13tion
(6) SheU exp ansion plan

Remark: Requ irem ents except urcse speci fied In this standard shall, as 3 rule, be in accordan ce with (he 4 .1 Scant ling Th e presen tau o n of scan tlings on rolled sections (includi ng buil t-up sect ion s) and the br acke ts,
requireme nts o f ns z
83 12. liS Z 8313 and .lIS Z 83 J4. e tc . shall be as given in Table 2 .

2. Applic ations of Lines

Ap plicato ns of lin es shall be as given IIi T able I.

Table 1

Type of Lrne Applications

Section o f pia te thic kn ess

Continuous thick Attaching line o f bo undary panel of suo-divin on on th e near side

(Ex am ples: bulkh ead , deck, platform dec k)

Visible outlines
Opening
Joint
Contin ous thin Thickness o f face plate or Oange plate
Reference lines
· Dim ensi on lines
Extension hne and leader hne
Hatching
Attaching line of boundary panel of sub-division on the [ill srde

Short dash es thi ck (Ex amples: bulkhea d. deck, platform deck)

------- - Attaching line of girder and web On the far side

·· F3I side attach ed Ilan ge thic kness

Indication of far side co mpartment
Short das hes thin Ou tline of d ou bling pla te on th e far side

- - - - --- - --
Atta chi ng lin e of sti ffener and b e.1111 on the pan el plan e (f3I side at tac hed) (2)

Attaching line of stiffener and beam on the far Side of girder and web
~~c~ t hick Girder and web on th~ panel plane (both neal side and far side a tta ched }
Stiffener and beam on the panel plane ncar side a tta ched
Long chain thin
- -- --
· Stiffener and beam on near side of gird er and web
Centre line
Knuckle line
Indication of compartment On nearsi de
-
Note (2) ;

3. Views and Dire cti on of Ship

3 .1 Direction of view s Dlrect ion of views shall be as follo ws:

(I ) A plan is drawn as viewed from above to below.

(2) A side view is dra wn as viewed from starboar d side to port side .

(3) A cross secti o nal view is drawn as viewed from aft to forward .
Remar k: Typical examples of drawing ale sho wn in Referen ce Plgure.

- 24 ­ - 25 ­
F 020 1·1 983 F 11 2111 " IK I
Table 2 (Cou tinued )
Table 2 Presenlation of scantling
Presema tion
Typ e
Present atio n Buil l up type Rolled type
Type
Built-u p type Rolled type

I A X B X1,/ 1, lA

ffiIf
Ron ed Or

Bnill-up (3)
sccnon
(1) .,;: " B
A . X I,+B X/ , ( T ) A,x BXI, /I. ( T )
~~
-.:-! I
AX t BP
01

Bulb plate

16~
• Ax t

Bwl l-Up (J )
(L » A,X I.+ BX t, ( L ,) A, x BxtJI. (L ,)

~
":'1
I,
Fl"1 bar Ax I FB
(Slab b ar )

Built-up (3)
(L ' )

I
iLJ
"' B ~' A, Xt ,+ B X t, ( L,)

I
A,X BXt,/l, ( L,)

Face plat e
AX t F B ( T)

.r4
t, Axt F B CL, )
Buill' Up(3)
I
(L.) " fj AXI,+B X I, ( L,) -
I

A X B XI.! I, CH
or
Channel
I
~
~~. . -1 . ! _~====~j --=-=-----.J.­ - - -
r-&1~ ~ I
Built.u p ( 3)
(L') A,XI, + S,X l, ( L,) A , X 11, X 1,/ t, ( L ,)
::'==i =.t....:!
W -d
r
¢ . Rll

ROUJld bar
. ­
Note (") : Refer to Table 3 for the meanings of T . L, . L, . L1 and L...

- 26 ­ - 27 -
F 0201· 1983
F 0 20 1· I~ X '
Table 2 (Continued) 4.2 Presentation of scantlin g and location of members
Present ation
TYpe 4.2 .1 Dimension lin es Present ation o f dimension lin es shall be in accordance with the requirement s
Built-u p ty pe Rolled ty pe of JIS Z 83 17 (Fig. I) . Th e dim en sion lines always repr esent mould Iiues. However , wh en specific notation is
given, they may be used as th e present ati on of piare cutt ing allo wance.

Unh : mm
PI LL ~ ,:) x I
li -tH
,
300
-I

! ~ I ~{m _ _ Fig . I

1
~I I~_ _ -­
4 .2.2 Presentation of dimension figures Th e pr esent ation of dim ension figures involving dimension
lines in th e horiz ont al directi on shall be made imm edi ately above and along the dim ension lines leavi.n g a small
Pillar I A,X B X I, ! I, ( H ) space in betw een , where as th at involving dim ension lin es in the verti cal directi on shall likew ise be made immedi ­

~ lli ately o n th e left side alon g the d imensionllnes in obhque direeti on , the above prin ciples apply mut at is mu tan dis
JL
1 to (Fig . 2). Presentation of dimensi on figures in hatch ed sectio n shall be avoided as far as prac ticable.
I '
Uni u mm
A-A
I A,A,xx BX
B x t,/I, ( H) .
I,jt, (I ),

I A, X B X t,!I, CH) or
II A, x B x I ,!I, ( I )
'I

( ')

/ ('.::FLl

4.23
Fig . 2

Presentati on of dimensi on figures for narrow space When only a narr ow space is available for
uo ting dim en sion figures to th e ex tent no entry can be mad e. eithe r leader lines shall be used (Fig. 3 (a)) or di­
mension figur es shall be written above the ex tension line of the dimen sion line (Fig . 3 (b) ) .

Uniti rrun
( ' )
( a) ( b)
AxBx l
Bracket «..:FLl 20

/ r
100
_~ _L
I
r 100

I r
lUO
r"
.
-

.r! x B x t
l I I I lIT
/
l( ' :' , Fi g. 3

4 .2.4 Presentation of dim ension figures for equal spaeing Th e pr esentation of dimen sion figures for
equ al spacing shall be made in such a mann er thai dimension figures are not ed for both oute r en ds of spaces with
simplified entries with - s , " for the rest of equally devided spaces (Fig. 4) _
Urut: mm

~
Half-round bar ,
I I

No te ('): (OFL) applies to the 0'''' where flanged member is involved.

1
1. 0
J J ISO ,I
Fig. 4

- 28­ - 29 ­
 f 0201· 198 3

4 .25 Presentation o f dim ensi ons along girth Th e presenta tio n o f dime nsio n figures for curv ed rnem - 4..2.8 Presentation of dim ension lines with one end not sp ecifiable When the locati on of a n" ·,"lo... I
bers shall be ma de by drawing a dim e nsion lin e co ncen tric with a given cu rve and dimen sion figures shall be made 10 be given by referr ing to the d atum line in a remote place , an arrow shall be writt en only at t he posit ion " I II"
above the dimen sion line (F ig. 5). me mb er with a notation o f the n ame o f d at um lin e (F ig. 8) .

Unit: mrn UnH: mm

( 8) ( b)

1
:!I

~I
10 800 OFF (or F ROM) It.
Fig . 5

4 .2.6 Presenta tion of arc radius Pr esentati on of arc radiu s shall be as fo llows :
Fig. 8
( 1) When the dimensio n line is fitted , an arrow shall be placed insid e o f the arc only (F ig. 6 (a) ).

(2) When th e ce n tre of radius IS far from th e arc , part of th e dim ension lin e ncar th e cent re of arc 43 Pr esentation of openings
may be omil ted (Fig . 6 (b)) . 43 .1 Gen eral Th e pr esen tati on of ope nings shall be ma de in such a mann er th ai cro ssed eentre lines
and o u tlin es of the o pe nings a re writte n with dim en sion s of openings an d abbreviate d n ame of ope nings such as
(3) When the scale coruracuon is to o large to put in an arrow, th e p resen tati on of radial dim en sion s
doo r ope nin g, ha tch co aming, access ope ning, pipe hole, e rc., ab ove the ex te nsio n lin es (Fig. 9).
shaJJ be made b y writin g, fo r example R I SO, on the insid e of th e arc (Fig . 6 (c)) .
Unil : min
( 8) (b) ( c)
Unni rnm
( 8) ( b) Cc)

400 >< 500 MH

+ 600 x 600 >< 1<50 VH

Fig . 9
Fig . 6
When o pen ings with ident ical dime nsion s are arranged ,
4 .3 .2 Openiugs with iden tical dim eu sion s
4 .2 .7 Prese ntation o f dim ensions of inclin ed me m ber For mem bers arr an ged in the posi tion inclined be represent ed by crossed centre lines or by out line s o nly
th ose loc at ed Ul the in rermedia te po sitio ns may
to t he projec tio n plane, the pre sent a tio n of the ir d imensions shall be made with actu al figures (Fi g. 7 (a».
For memb ers' posin ons, th ose on th e plan e of pr oject ion shall be used as t he y are (Fig. 7 (b». (Fi g. 10 ).
Exce pt fo r th ose presentat ion s, specific notation s sh all be made . (a) ( b)

( a)

Fig. 10

I. o
Remade: Long ch ain lines sho w the devel oped shapes,

Fig . 7

- 31­
- 30 ­
 F 0201 ·1 983 F 0201· 198.1

4.4 Presentation of doubling plates The p resent at ion o f doubling plate s shall be as follows :
43.3 Openings arran ged On th e sam e line When o penings are arra nged o n the same line , th eir loc a­
tions may be indic at ed in o ne place (Fig. lI (a» . When th ey are arr anged In the middle ofun stiffe ned plat es both (I) When lilted on th e near side of th e panel, the o utline of d oubling plat es shall be repr esen ted by thin
h orizon tally and vertically, their loca tion s may be omitted ( Fig. II (b» . co ntinuo us lines wit h hat ching inside the o ut line (Fig. 14(a» .

(2) When till ed o n th e far side of the pa nel, th e outl ine shall be repr esen ted by sho rt dashes with hat ch.

Unlr : mm ing inside the ou tl ine (Fig. l4{b)). .

( 11) (b) The hat ching ma y be do ne only nea r th e o ulline .

Remark: When presentatio n o f the d oub ling plate ts obvio us in all respect s. hat chmg may be omitted .

( 11) (b)

Fig . 11

4.3.4 Door op enings and access op enings Th e heights o f doo r ope nings and access openmgs may be
rep resent ed by th e sill height bet wee n th e do or and th e lower edge o f th e o pe ning (Fig. 12).

Unit : mm
Fig. 14

4 .5 Presentation of co mpartme n t The enclosed comp artm ent s such as wa tertight co mpartme nts , cilti ght
comp artm en ts, airtigh t compa rtme nts , e tc. shall be repr esent ed by thin long chain lines each co nne cting diagon al
com e rs of th e co m part men ts when they are locat ed on the fro n t side o f the di vision . Th ey shall be rep resent ed
by sho rt dash es each co nnec ting in the same way when t hey are far side of the division (Fig. IS).

( 11) ( b)

Fig. 12

4 .3 .5 Openings arran ged at equal inte rvals When openings are ar ranged con tinuou sly at equ al in ter­
vals. p resenta tio n o f dime nsio n ligu res may be ma de in such a m an ner that th ey are writ te n only at both ou ter
end s WIth simplified ent ries with " n" fo r the rest o f sp aces eq ually divided (Fig. 13). ( c)

( d)
Unit : rom

1\ !

I \
,,--­I
I\
I \
l
I
)~
Remark ; This presenta tion applies to ope ning po sitions such as drain holes, CIC. l/ " -,

F ig. 13

Fig. 15

- 32 ­ - 33 ­
 1'020 1·1983 I' 0201·1983
5. Sy m bols

Graphical sy mbols an d letter sy m bo ls shall be in acco rdance wit h Table 3. Table 3 (Co n tin ued)

Table 3 Gra phical symbols and lette r sym bols It em S ymbo l Rem ark s

I To sho w th e dir ecti on o f flange,

Item Symb ol Remark s I single-legged
use d
arr o w m ay be

~-- --- - - - -

-~
End o f stiffe ne r
. ""'--. d . ­
Buu j olru - .....---­ - -­ - ,,- -­ - -9 --­ -
"
£.
;;
-e
Block io int
~.- - -I -1
I
. - ._­ - - - -­ - -
" I L: lu g co nn ect io n
~
Lap joint - -­ !
-
,­ - _ .- -­ - - ­- - -
r -
\ L

I
Fo r th e lug connection with
scallop , L H m ay b e used .

r­
<l)

- .~
s:u; I c. clip co nn ec ti o n
I One-row - - - ;­ - -­
'-
0
3 - c
I F Or th e ch p co nne ct ion
scallop , CH ma y be u sed .
w ith

len -----5
,9
T wo-row -­ -If.' --­ - -;:;
"
~
;: s I s: snip en d
.§, , 0
u
"E Thr ee-row -If?! -­ "'"
- :.fj
~

~
II
i2 B -
Zig-zag - - ./-1/ - -
S

End o f riveted joint L_

-
- -"._­ -
On de ck
0
­
.... ....
1>!ldship
ill ~._ . -
-
--- _ . ~-
"
;:;
c,
Un der d eck
I
(
\
, _ .... I
\
I
Sh owi ng th e secti on al sha pe of
pillar (the case of circ ular pillar).

Centerline
£ -

On an d unde r deck I
Q
__
\ ..... /
\
I
I

Thickness ----z....­ . Examp le

~
10

~
- -­ I eT) -
Plan ...,1
:<: j
,
I
KL
J:<: 1 d
Knuckle line
Section
,9 ( L ,) -
Q I
~
<, 0..
.3

-;:;"
a.
e-c
Con tinuous
rn When clea rly seen on the
d rawings, these symbo ls
may be omil ted .
""i:O

IJ
~
I
( L ,)

--I
I
-
-

[0 ( L. ) -
'"" Inte rcostal
I
...­
[

- 35 ­
- 34 ­
 F 020 ) · 19R.l
F 0201 · 1983

Table 3 (Co n tin ued) 6. Welding Symbol

6.1 Weldin g sym bo l shall be shown only whe n necessary ,

Hem
I Symbo l Remar ks
6.2 Sym bol for welding except for au tomatic butt welding shall be in accor dance with the requirements of
1 lIS Z 3021.
!
.~"
~
I
I

"''?- '
0 . _-- -­
( L,)

- - - - -­ __ _.r .
-­
- 63

(I)
P rese ntation o f th e ty pe of automatic butt welding shall be supp leme nte d by th e followi ng descrip tio ns.

Location of presentation Th e presenta tion of th e ty pe o f au to ma tic butt welding m eth od shall be

made by writing th e welding method or sym bol spec ified in (2) at the spec ific place of notation of

~
,:;;
"
OJ
!
! 0 CH) - weldin g symbols laid dow n in lIS Z 3021.

r-< - - -,
- - -~
-- --- (' \

Flat bar 1'3 -

' .... Specific place of notati on

Invert ed angle L lA - (2) Presentation Prese nt a tio n shall be made as follows:

!
II ;
I
,- - ­ - I
(a) Welding me tho d shall be spelled ou t by full nam e at t he specific pla ce o f notation,

c
I Bulb plat e . 31' - ~ CONTAC·T
. BAR SUB MERGED
:§ Example: / ' , <,
<-> !

il
e ,_
~ I
Ch annel
­ - -
[ CH
-
- (b) Arb itrary abbrevi atio n may be written a t th e specifi c place o f n otation while giving its nota tion
of the drawing. The ab breviatio n in thi s inst anc e sh all be given by numerals or mor e than
t hree En glish char act ers.
H bar H H -
or ~CBS
I bar I J --
I -_ .. ­

~
i Ro u nd bar Rfi - Th e not ati on in thi s instance shall be made as show n below.

'" __ _ _ _ ___ _ _ conta ct bar subme rged, or

'" Half-ro u nd bar HR3 -
I - ­ - - -- - - - - - -- - - , 1-­ - - -- - CBS - -- ------ contact bar subme rged
i
Grade A No symbo l (c) No twit hs tan ding th e requir ements of ·C
.) and (b) mentioned above, th e notation fo r welding
- - - - -- - -- : me thods given in Tabl e 4 m ay be om lttedhy wri ting their symbols a t th e specifi c place o f nota ­
3
-,; 1 Gra de B ' ( I) No sy mbol is desig­ tion .
I " -
~
:E
I Grade C
- -- - - - - - - - ...
C
(2)
nat ed to mild sreel,
Grad e A .
Sym bo l (N) is add ed
T able 4
~ I
to norm alized steel
"
;;; i Gra de D 1)
ma terial ,
.- ----­ Sym bo l
E I - - - - - '
(3) Classific'''ion o f Gra des
Weldmg me thod :

~-
Grade E E
;.;" I1- ' - - - - ­
A, B, C, D, and E steel
shall be iu accordance
Sub merged arc weldin g co mbined with manu al arc welding
'-
c with the Rules of Clas­ S
~ -;:; Grade A AH Dou ble side subm erged a rc welding
-g ! - - -- - - - -- ­ sificario n Society .

*
- - - -- "
:.: \ (4) Fo r the st rength of high R
Grade B fiB One side sub me rged arc weld ing (RF)
0 te nsile carb on steel,
-e - - ---- - - -­ ---_._ - - - - --­ figures shall be add ed
Oue side su bme rged arc weld ing ( FA B) A
'"
u
G radeC .. CH to sho w th e st rength o f
.~" _ ._- -- - - -_ . . '- ­ - _. the steel ,
Example: AH32
One side subm erged arc weld ing ( FCB) F

I ~" Gt adeD
- _..- . -••...
DH
One side submer ged arc weld ing (KL) K
.c: -- ,_.
i l
00

I G rade E EH Co nsu ma ble nozzle electroslag weld ing CE

EG
Electr oga s arc weldin g

Remark: English leiters here sta nd for 26 capi tal letters of alphabet (A to Z) and numerals o f
) 0 Ara bic ligures (0 109 ).

- 36 ­ - 37 ­
F 020J- 1983 I· IIIUI I 'Ji. I

( I) On a plan , port side half of the upper surface of projectio n of a ship shall be drawn.
Reference Standards:

~
JlS Z 302 1 - Symbolic Represen ta tlon
Jl S Z 8312 - Technical Drawing - Line Conventions
AP
o CJ FP
JIS Z 8313 - Technical Drawing - Lettering
JlS Z 83 14 - Techn ical Drawing - Scales
JIS Z 83 17 - Techn ical Drawing - Dimensioning

(2) On a side View, por t side in ner surface of projection o f a ship shall be drawn.

llL

(3) On a eross sectio nal view, port side h alf of the after surfaee of a ship shall be drawn.

(4) On a shell expansion , port SIde inner surface of a ship shall be drawn .

Referenee Figure

- 38- - 39 ­
F 0201.1 983 F0201· 1% J

ANNEX 4. Designation of Strakes, Seam s and Butt Joints

4.1 Designati on o f strakes shall be as given in An nex Table 2.

Designations and Symbols for Strakes, Seams and Butt J Din ts, and
Annex Table 2 Designat ion o f strokes
Numbering for Frames and Girders

Re ference for Designation Designation o f other sn akes Grap hical exa m ple
h em designation of ref eren ce
1. Sco pe o \
Thi s S tandard applies to th e d esignat ion s and symbols for st rakcs, seam s and bu tt jo m ts, and numberin g fo r
i \ c
frames and girders o n the basic hull con stru ct ion plans. Designate A, B, C•... as i t B
Shell KeeI plate K goe s u pward s. TIl e shee r
' lJ
2. Gene ral
st ra ke is represente d by S.
---t­ . _
A
_K _ .
She ll ex pa nsio n
--+ rt
2. 1 Base fonn of presenta tion Presen tati on shall be m ade as follows:
) C (

-+-._~ _.--+- rt I
lli= Designa te B) C. D• .. as II
I
L additiOnal symbol or num ber Deck Cen tre nn e A goes ou tboard . I) B
L to be inse rted when le u ers or num erals follow
stra ke

Deck pla te
designation of strakes an d joints or num ber of fram es and girders

'-- - - - - - designa tion of assortment

2.2 Chara ct er English eha rac ters and/or numer als shall be used in lette rs o f the presen tatio n. Capi tal
Dengna te B) C. D. ,".as it
lett ers shall be used in the alph abet , an d I, 0 and X shall no t be used inde pende n tly . English cha ract ers here Bu lkh ea d Lowermost A goes upwards.
sta nd for 26 capital let ters of alphabe t (A to Z) and num erals o f 10 Arab ic figures (0 10 9) . stra ke

23 Num ber o f column Not speciflcally p rovided . Secric n

3. Designation o f Assortm ent

Remarks: I. The ca..~ wher e t he num ber o f str akes decre ases . . . • ..
V,1,ere the number er st rakes de creases at fore andjc r"all ends o f ~!up s. huD. d ~lbJl3Uo n of
Designation of assor tm ent shall be as given in An nex Tab le 1. Howe ver. it may be o mirte d when clea rly strakes shall b e made so th a t the n am e o f the adjo ini ng strake loca ted ei ther i nboard SId e .or.lower
un derstoo d. side is em ployed refe rring to the centreline , and th e na me oCdec reased shake s hall be eli mina ted
{Annex Fig. 1 (a» .
Ann ex Ta ble 1 Designation o f assortment 2. Th e. case w here t he nu mb er o r sn akes increases . . .. 1
Wher e Ole numb er o f srrak es in creases, designatio n of st rakes shall be ma de by P.VU;~ :H l dJ l l o n ~
lIe m Classificarion Symb ol of classifica tion num ber to th e sym bo l of the st rake. Snch nu mbering shall be mad e so that no~bc r like 1, 2 • ... ts
p 'IIC n in Older to Ihe i ncr eased snakes mak ing. a strake nearest to cen tr eli ne :I key number
Shell S (Annex Fig. 1 (b)).

Stra ke Bulkhead B ( a) ( b)

Deck D
Seam S
Jo in!
Bull
I B

Lo ngitudinal frame L
Fram e, girde r Frame F

Girder G

Annex Fig. 1

- 40 - - 41 ­
F 0201 ·1 983 F 020 1· I'IN>

4.2 Designation of seams and bull joint s shall be as given in Ann ex Table 3 . 5. Numberi ng of Frames and Girders

Annex Table 3 Designation of joints Numbe ring of frames and girders sh all be as given in Annex Table 4.

Annex Table 4 Numberin g of frame s and girders

Item Designati on Gr aphical exa mple
Str uctu ral Referen ce poauion Designanon Deagnarion o f Graphi cal
memoer for dengn an nn of reference o the r membe rs exa m ple
\ 0 Sll
(

Designat e t he seam by pu tl ing letter "S'~ \ c SC I

l
AfL I Fore
just before the symbo l o f t he srrak c fa.r
Sca m

from th e cen treli ne. Fo r the same seam ,

lJ S8 Op tio nal
~
Deegnatc I, 2, 3• . as t t goes I •
Transverse c ormauy.,n ' he forward . i
3~ a rule , pu t the same nam e coruin uc usjy,

")
--T-.
ASA
-K~-- --------'.- t'
I -
frame vrcm u y of aft pe rpe n-
d tcu lar
0
Designate - l, - 2, -3. ... as 11
goes af't.
-2 -I
I I I I LJ._I_
0 I 2 3 4

Shell expansio n

Bu tt
Des ignat e th e butt by p nttin g let ter " B"
j ust bef o re th e frame nnm ber on the
)
'I
') JlliJ
(I'-

Il
")
S

l)

Deck
lou gitud inal
Cen treline
I
0
Designate l. 2 , 3,
o u tbc ard
.. 3 $ it @' o es
p-1 6
"'
5 4 3 2 1
I

stern srde.
+-ts-- 56
SheUexpan sion

57 -5~ rt..

~" L
I
Deslg:nalc 1. 2. 3• . as H goes
:
Remrak s: 1.

2.
Th e case where 1I ~ nu mber of seam s decrea ses (A nnex Fig. 2 (a».

Th e case where the num ber o r seams inc rea ses ( An nex Fig. 2 (b)).
She U
.longitudinal
Ce n treline 0
I ou tb oar d or towards th e upper
deck. ~
17
16 I
3. ~lere two o r m or e nu mber of b u tts ex ist wit hin the sam e fr aruc space. de signa ­ I\. 15
--4
r f
~ 2
[
!
i
0
[
~ lv n of b u ns shall be m ade by g iving addt ucnal nu mbe r f or iden tifica tion . whi ch
meceases fro m th e cen tr eli ne (Annex Fig. 2 (c j}. ~
1

Deslgn ate I . 2. 3. ... as I I goes --- 5 4 3 2 1 b

Doub le: bo t to m
lo ngitudinal
Ce ntreli ne 0 outboard . -----rTl TT ~-·
The n umber $h aU be rden ucal
(a) Cb ) wit h The Rum ber of bottom
lo ngrtu dmal ,
[ r r r r r
-- - 5 4 3 2 1 I':

~.
zo
r-'

19
I
Longuc clna l Bilge lo ngrt udm al 0 1
Designa te ne l , n+2 , 0+3, .
as it gees t owa rds (he upper , I
I
r-'

r-: J& 1
b ulkhe ad ou termost bcuorn n deck.
\on gJtudma l lon gitu din al T h e number shall be ide n ucal
with 'h e numbe r o f side
17 ,-- 17
I \
longrt u dm al,
, _l ~
,-- 16
i
15 <t
Cc )

Bd ge hoppe r
lon gitud inal
Double bo t to m
ou termo st gird er

;
n
Design at e ne l , n1'2 . n"') • ...
as n goes o u tbo ard.

~L r r
17 10 05 )
16
14

]7 1"
r

~
De$1...... te n el , 0+1. " +3• ..
Top sldc lank Inbc ard end o r top 31 it tot" o u l bo ard .
b ot tom nd e ta nk b otto m n Th e nu mber shall be rdenncal
19 18

Annex F ig. 2
lo ngnudinal plat e with the num ber of uppe r de ck
fo ngit ud tnal .
.>:
- 42 - - 43­
 lIS

F 0201 - 1963 F 0301 ·1990

Annex Tabl e 4 (Continued) Schemes of Thermal Insulation

of Piping for Small Ships
S truc tural Reference position De signa tion Design a rion of
me mber Gr aphical
for designation of refer ence ot her memb ers exampl e
1. Scope

Longirud inais
JiUed to girder
Panel
( structu ral memb er )
fitt ed wi th girders
0
De signa te I >2, 3/ .. . as Jl goes
tow ards free edge of gtrd er.

11 ­ Pane l
I
3
Gilder

~ l
"0
;;
""
This Japan ese Industrial Standard specifies schemes of thermal or swear insulation for hull pipes in
small ship s. For thermal in snl ation of piping, how e ver, thi s standard applie s onl y to cases where the
temp erature of the fluid in pipes is 60°C or more.

2. Materials
Lon gitudin als Designat e by skipping the The type s of principal material s and their classified applications shall be as follows.

In terp osing .
Int er po sing girde r, longi tu -
girder, din a! bu lkhead or deck. (1) Classificati on or materials The materials used for thermal or swear insulation shall be as given
Jon gitudmal - - assummg th at I r is a
bulkhead o r in Table 1 or eq uivale nt.

h yp oUte ticaJ lon giludmaJ

deck 15 Asbes tos materials shall nOIbe used .

,t Cuc er. fo ngn uorna; Table 1

I bulkh ead or deck

Kind Materi al
Intermediat e Ro ck woo l insu lation plate Thermal insulati on material made or roc k woo l
frame betwe en IS 16 Rock wool insulation sleeve spec! r,ed in J IS A 9504
n th fram e Designa te n- }, n- 2. n- 3. 15-1 15-2

r
nth an d {n+ Ilth n
fr am es
fa cin g La (n+ 1)th fram e.
[ [ l Glass wool insul ation plate
Class woo l insu lation slee ve
Calcium sllicaie therma l msu) a.tlon plate.
Th ermal insulati on material made of glas s
wool spec ified in J IS A 9505
Thermal insulati on materi al made of Calc ium
Calci um silicate thermal insulation sleev e silicate specified in J1S A 9510
, < Glass fabric s Gl ass Fabrics spec ified in JIS R 3414
Designa te m, n, ... as H goes 2 1 0
Deck gil d er G I:t3Stape s Glass tapes speci f ied in 1(S R 3415

rl rr l r!1
Cen u eline 0 ou tboar d (m an d n are
Bou om gir der
op tion al in regen un der the Couon can vas COtLon canvas No. [I spec ified in J lS L 310:Z
conditio n of m< n.)

(7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (l) (0 )

(2) Classili-e-d app licati on of materials The cla ss ified appli ca rion s of materials fo r thermal
t insulation or SWeat insulation of pipe s shall be as give n in Table 2.

1:
Horiz ont al
gir der
Designate m , n, .. as IL goes
(9) 2
Longirudmal (IS)
Upp er deck 0 to ward s bo tto m. (m and n are
bu lkh ead
strin ger op tio nal in tegers und er the (J7)
Side stnnger condmo n of m < u.) (16)
OS 3 J
(14)

Remarks: l. The Case where longi lud maJ nnmber oecreases,

\..\:~ - - -- - Llo
- ­
-? ~ _-----r:== . _

~ . ---- _ Ll 5 _ _ _

Ll 4

2.

~. -. ==7-­
The case where longnu dinal uu mbcr in cre ase.

_ _ L 26

L25-1

U S
Reference Sta nd ar ds
JIS A 9504- Therma l Insularion Material Made of Rock Wool
JIS A 9505 - Thermal Insulation Materi al Made of Glass Wool
JIS A 9510- Therm al Insulation Material Made of Calcium Silicate
JIS L 3102-Cotlon Canvas
JIS R 3414 -Glass Fabri cs
.lIS R 3415 -G lass Tapes

- 44 - - 45­
 F 0 30 1-199U
F 0 30 1-1990

Table 2 3. Pr acti ce
T he insulation should generally be performed as shown in Figure.
Area of
appli- Division Ap plication/loc ation of pipes Insul ationmateri al Covering (1) Pipe coverin g only
cal ion
Pipes.requ iring sweat Cooling water Uncovered Pipe s -
insula tion installed in pipe s. Sea water space s Joints - Valve
are a!'; affec ting electrical pipes Cove red Pipes Glass Iabncs
installations and cargoe s spaces Jc ihts G lass wool insulat ion No . 11 canvas Pipe Joint
carri ed board
Pipes requmng thermal Hot water pipes. Uncover ed Pipes Glass woo l insul atio n Covermg mal erc}
insul ation etc spaces sleeve, calcium silicate Covering material I
Joints
I insulat ion slee ve
Glass wo ol insulati on 3-laye r glass tape
1: board
e.
."
I spaces
Cove red Pipes Glass wool ins ulation No. 1 Lcanve s
sleeve . calci um silicat e
~
U ins ula tion sleev e
~ Joints Glass. woo l inaularicn 3-layer gras s tape
boa rd
Pipe s requiri ng t hermal Sle3 TIl pipe, ex haust Uncovered Pipes Rock wool insul ation Glass fabrics
insulation for the pipes , thermal sp aces sleeve
pro tection of human medium pipes. Join ts Rock wool insulatio n (2) Combina tion of thermal insulation an d covering
body smoke.stacks (or board
Thennal inro latlon mater ilJ
heal ing Covered Pipes - 3-layer glass [ape
spaces Joints -
Pipes requiri ng thermal Hot water pi pes. Pipes Glass wool insul ation
insulalion for hea l stea m pi pes , slee ve TheCID3 l insulation mat erial
u
~
~
preservation and therma l medi um Joint Glass wool insul ation
!
/
~ preve mlon of bea t loss pi pes Uncovered boa rd Glass fabrics
-: ....
50. Pipes requiring therm al Fresh water pipes. spaces Pipes G lass wool insulation
0 msuladon for guard ing ere. sleev e
agains t low tempe raurrc Joints Glass wool insul ation
I board
\ Covering mater ial
\ Covcring ma ter ial

- 47 -
- 46 -
 JIS

F 0302-1 977 I' 0 302· 19 77

F 03 02· 1977

Sta ndard Practices for Thermal Insulation Work for

Small Ship s' Airco nditioning Ducts
St ~e1 pIne coven ng Doil

Steel plate covet ing

""
1. Scope
Thi s Jap anese Industr ial St anda rd specifie s fo r the rmal insula tio u wo rk for small ships' airco ndi tio ni ng
SCct io n of dUCI
du cts .
Weat her deck
2. Rang e of Application of Thermal Insul at ion for Ducts

T he t he rm al insula tion fo r ducts shall be applied to th e who le length of duct fro m th e outlet of cooling and
Fo.une d po lysty rene in.su lat or
h eating unit to room o ut lets . Ho we ver, th e therma l insulat ic n fo r return d uc ts sha ll be app lied on ly to th e part
o f th e duct wh ich passes ou tside cooled or heat ed Spaces.
Fig. 3 On Weather Deck
3. Mat erials

The ma teri als shall have th e th erm al Insulation. pow er at least eq uivalent to those specified in this
st and a rd .
Deck
4. Standard Practices of Work
y

Th e sta ndard pra cti ces of work shall, as a rule, be in accorda nce with Figs. I to 6 Standa rd practi ce of th erm al
insulation w ork sha ll be th e \ - ~~da!dYEstl c e of t herm al insulation work f or
S[aI)d31d practic e of thermal insu­
\ larion work in th e ceiling shill b~_
,\th~s shown in Fig. 6
Remark: It is recommended Ih ,H the outer surfaces of ther mal tnsuta tion 111 dam p space:"w ell as S3 m~' nFi.g .l o pe n part $h all be the same 3S sho wn in F\ g. I

}~re
ba throom, galley. toilet OJ wate r close t be coa ted with wa terproof palm 0 1 bound up
l Fmish wnh asbestos plate
wiUl wat erpr oof tape, Deck and hard cement up to t he
1lo p.....0.f.tht ough piece I,
~ t
Throu gh pJece

Wire gau ze , )
Duct \
Sta ndard pra ctice of thermal J •
! " / / / .
~
Adhesi-r.e lnsu lat Jon wo rk sha ll be t he
same as shown 111 Fi1!: . 1

Du ct

\\ \ F ib re glass itJ: Ub.10I

\ \ Blndiug with wile gauze or brass wire .

Fib re g13ss tn ml.ato r \
I,
\
Fig . 4 Part passing through Deck or Steel Wall
( Filled with thr ongh piece)
' Paint o ver co lto n can vas envelo pe oC
Paint o ver co Uo n ca nv:u envelope ot \
No IO orll inJlS L3102
No.lO Or 1J in Jl S L 3102

Fig. 1 F or Gen eral Purpose

Deck
r::
Sta ndar d practke o f therma l insu lation wot k St::l.I1.d3.Id pr act'lce of th ermal
DindUlg ""jlh wire gauze for visible part shall be th e same as shown m -, 'Crn ~ ub ti on work in the CC il Ul~
'I._hall b e as sho wn in F;~
~~ \ Paint o ve r co tton ca nvas envelo pe of No . J 0 or
~ ill;; lIS L 3102 OJ asbestos ci~ t h envelope
:~ Fig . ! \

z::~====.,

SW'ldard nracb:e o f t he rmal I

i n~;u ) 3t1 0n work" shaH b~ the /~
. . ,. .
~
Y \. same u sho wn in fig. 1
\ \fibre g la~ !i InsulatOr

~~n t_,?v! r co t to n Can vas envelo pe of No .I O 01

"'- Sl•• 1 wall
\
_~ _[ in ~IS L 3: 102' ~_r a d; ~~~~~j;;th;. n~~ l ~ p e tibre glass Insul3mr
Fig . 5 Part passing thro ugh Deck o r St",,1 Wall
Fig. 2 In Machinery Space (Not fit ted with through piece )

- 48 ­ - 49 -
 F 0302 -19 77 JIS

F 0303-1992

Ships made offibreglass reinforced plastics ­ Design of earth

Deck
Deck beam
C
li'
e=­ 1. Scope 'This Japanese Industrial Standard specifie s the following earthing applied 10 ships made of fibre-
glass reinfor ced plastics (excluding ships with a length of 12 metre s or less).
(1) Earthing for gene ral elec tric appliances (including electri c cables ) (hereinafter referred to as "general
/ electri c applian ces")
(2) Earth ing for navigation equi pment and radio equipm ent (including electroni c equipment for fishing)
(hereinafter referred to as " navigatio n equipm ent etc.")
Duct -~ (3) Earth ing for lightni ng conductors
I ~re glass insulato!
Remark: 'This Standard make s reference to the following standards:
Celling / Insert insulatol as fa.r as
prac ticable and take measwe JIS C 33lY7 - 600V Polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (Symbol : IV )
Bind wi th braS-ii; wire ~yei1t it fro m (aIling JlS C 3406 - Low-volta ge ca ble s for autom obiles
01 sui table tape
JlS F 0031 - Glossary of terms for shipbuilding (E lectric Pan)
JlS H 3100 - Copper and copper alley -s heets, plates and strips
Fig. 6 Concealed Part such as in the Ceiling
2. Definitions For the purposes of this Standard. the following definitions apply.
(1) Underwater area The area of a ship well belo w the light load water line , which remain s immersed
in water under all conditions of die ship at sea including trimmed and heeled co nditions.
(2) Earthing copper plates A conductor provided underw ater, which is regarded as an earth .
Reference Standard : (3) Earthing main Conductors connected CO the earthing copper plates.
(4) Earthing branch Condu ctors connected to the earthing main .
ns L 3102 - Cotton Canvas
(5) T erminal earthing cond uct or Co nd uctors for conn ectin g equipment to an canhing branc h or
equ ipment to the earthi ng main.
(6) Lightning system The generi c term for a lightning arran gement co mprising spike s or metal masts,
lightning conductors and earthin g copper plate s to prevent fires, dama ge and pers onal injurie s caused
by lightning shocks.
(7) Spike A met al piece fined to the tip of a lightnin g rod to recei ve lightning shocks.
(8) Lightning conductors Conductors conn ecting the spike or the metal mast to earthin g copper plates
that permit lighrning curre nts to pass.
(9) Safe voltage Voltag e that is not harmful to human beings.
Remark: A safe volisge is detmed m SOLAS (Inteenau onal Ccnventica lor-the Sarel:] of Llfe at Sea) 3.0; a. vonagc UOI exceed­

ing 55V (or bothde and ac, however. iI is specifi ed as a voltage DOl exceeding5QVin IEe 92. (See JIS F 0031)

3. Earthing procedure Because the hull of an FRP ship is elec trically insulated, FRP ships shall be earthe d
by the procedures sho wn in Fig. 1 so that the respective earthing copper plates for general electric appli ­
ances and navigati on equipment etc., are fined independe ntly to the underwater ship bottom and general
electri c appliances and navigation equipment etc., are earthed by connecting them (0 the respective earthin g
copper plates through the earthin g main , earthi ng branch es and terminal earthin g conduct ors.
As shown in the figure. a lightning system with lightni ng conduc tors connecting die spike or the metal
mast to the earthing copper plate s of general electri c appl lances shall be pro vided in addition to the earthin g
cables speci fied abo ve .
Examples of earthing cond uctors for the general electri c applian ces are shown in Fig. 2. The earthin g
procedu res for navigation equipment shall be as guided by the examples.

- 50 -
- 51­
F0303-t 992 F OJ03-1992

Earth ing for general electric appliances. navigation equ ipment etc ., and lightning systems shall be as follow:
(1) Earthing of general electric appliances General elec tric applianees except incandescent light circuits
supplied with a safe voltag e shall be earthed principally for the safet y of human beings. protection of the
N on~nduc t.ive mast
equipment and preventi on of impediments cau sed by radiati on noise On navi gation equipment etc .
The installa tion of copper earthing plates . earthing main , earth in g branches and rerrninal earthing con­
ductors shall be as follo w:
(1.1) Earthing copper plates The earthing eopper plates shall co nform to JIS H 3100-CI IOOP and be pro­
vided below the wa terline . and each sbal l have an area of not less than O.2m' and the thickne ss o f not less
than O.5mm.
Mew antenna. past. Metal antenna. post (1.2) Earthing main Th e earthi ng main shall be installed as follow :
(a) The earthing main shall be connected to earthing branches or earthing terminal conductors and their ends
shall be connected to earthing copper places.
(b) The earthing main shal l be of mild copper co nformi ug to jlS C 3307. and its sectional area shall be not
les s than 14mm' .
(c) Th e eanbi ug main shall be laid straig ht without eonnecti ons as far as is pra cticable.
(1.3 ) Earthing branch Th e earthing branch es shal l be installed as follow :
(a) Th e eanhing branches shall be cc nneeted to the earth ing term inal conductors covering the sub-div isions
in which general electri c appli ances are provided . with their ends co nnec ted 10 the earthing main.
(b) The earthing branch es shall be of elec tric cond uctors conforming to JIS C 3307 or JIS C 34{)6 and their
sec tional area shall be not les s than 5rnm' .
(c) The earthing branches shall be laid straight with out conn ection s as far as is practicable.
(104) Earthing terminal conductors The earthing terminal conductors shall be installed as follow :
(a) Th e earthi ng terminal co nductors shall be connected 10 general elec tric appliances. with their ends con­
neeted to the earthing main or earthing branc hes.
(b ) The earthin g branches shall be of elecrrie condu ctors conforming to JIS C 3307 or JIS C 3406. It is rec­
- - Earthing main (or genu a] electric appiiaDces ~ Emhing mainfor navigation equipment ere.
ornmended in general that the secti onal area be 1(2 o f the sectional area of the power supply cable.
(2) Earthing of na vigation equipment etc. Na vigat ion eq uipme nt et c.• shall be earthed to ensure it fuoc­
_ . - Earthing branch for general electric epptiacce s - - Earthing brancb for uavigadcn equipmenc eLC. lions reliably. Each earthi ng co nductor of navigation equipment e tc ., through which high frequency cur­
rents flow, shall have the minimum impedance to ensure effective eart hing , unlik e the cases of direct cur­
~ Banning Lennina1 cables (or general el ectric :tppIW1cCS ~ Eartbing termin al cables for navigaLion equipment etc.
re nt or low frequency currents.
o Generalelectric appliances 0 N:t.vigation equipment etc. The earthing copp er plate s. the earthin g main . the earth ing bran ches and the e3I1hing terminal cond uc­
tors for the navigation equipment etc.. shall be iustalled as follow :
= Lightning conducior (2.1) Earthing copper plates The earthi ng copper plates shall eonform to JIS H 3100-CII OOP. Their sec­
tional area shall be not less man O.2m' and the thickness shall be not less than O.5m m.
~ Spike (2.2) Earthing main The earthing main shal l be ins talled as follow :
(a ) Th e earth ing main shall be co nnec ted ro the earthing bran ches or the earthing terminal condu ctors, wi th
Remark; Tbis figure showsthe caseof non-ronduaive masu, their ends con nected to the earthing cower plates .
(b ) The earthing main shall be of co pper stnp co nforming 10 jlS H 3100-C1 100P. Its width shall be not less
Fig. 1 than 80mm and the thi ckne ss shall be not less than O.5mm.
(c) The eanhing main shall be installed straigh t with the sho rtest possible run without co nnee tions as far as is
practicable.
o man:represeais general electric appliances (2.3)
(a)
Earthing branches The earthin g branches shall be installed as follow :
Th e earthing branches shall be connec ted La the earthing terminal condu ctors covering the sub-division s
in which naviga tion equipment etc ., is provided. with their end s connected LO the earth ing main.
EanIuog lem ma! cabl.,. (h ) The earthing branches shall be o f co pper s trips conforming to JIS H 3100-C I IOOP. Their width shall be
not less than 30mm and the thickn ess shall be not less than O.3mm .
V (2.4) Earthing terminal conductors The earthing-terminal conductors shall be installed as follow:
(a) The earthing terminal conductors shall be connected to navigation equipmen t, with their end s conn ected
\ Eanbing brancb to the earthing main or earthing branche s.
(b) The earth ing branches s hall be of copper strips conforming to JIS H 3100-CIIOOP. Their width shall be
Eanbing brancb Earthing main not less than 30mm and the thickn ess shall be not less than O.3mm or shall be of the equivalent conduc­
lOTS.
(2.5) Connections between navigation equipment etc., and the earthing main, earthing branches or
earthing terminal conductors These connec tion s shall be in accordan ce with the following requ ire-
ments.
The earthing main of transmitters (including transmitter/receiver) (hereinafter re ferred 10 as " trans­
miner") shall be conn ected straig ht to the earthing copper plates without connections as far as is practica­
Fig. 2 ble.

- 52 ­ - 53­
F 0303·t99 2 F 0303-t 992

Other earthin g co nductors for navig ation equi pment etc., shall not be co nnected to this earth ing main . As The mast lop shall be suc h that the ship can be shadowed within a cone formed by a line
IJ.2) Metal masts
shown in Fig. 3. the earthi ng main (a) o f the transmi tter shal l be installed separately from the earthing at an angle of 60 degrees to a ve rtical line that includes the spi ke tip .
main (b) for o ther navi gation equipmem e tc., and be co nnected to Ihe earthing co pper plates . The earthing copper plate s and the lighmin g condu ctors o f the lightning system shall be rnstalled as
follow :
1.1.2.1) Earthing copper plates The requirem ents of 3.(1) (1.1) shall apply co rres po ndingly to the earth ing
Other navigauon equipment etc. copper plates.
1.1.2.2) Lightning conduc tors
(a) The lightning conductors shall be of ncn-insulared co pper stranded wires with a sec tional area of not less
than 75mm'.
(b) The lightning cOndUClO[1; shal l be secure ly fixed to the mast at the point where the shrouds leave s the
mast or upper to en sure go od electrical contact with the mast, and then led al ong with the shrouds and
firmly co nnec ted to the earthi ng coppe r plates with clam ps.
(c) The lighrnin g conductors shall be fined straigh t without connections as far as practicable and shall not be
bent at a sharp angl e.
(d ) The clamp construction and material s shall be recommended to be of copper or brass and to have a serra­
Earthing copper plates for uavigauun equipment eLC. tion cootacr. Jt shall not be connec ted by solde ring.
1.1.3) Resistance of liglllning conductors The res istance of the lightn in g conductors from the spike tip or
the metal mast top to the earthing copper plate s shall nor exceed 0.02Q .

~ Earthing terminal conducto r

Fig . 3

(3) Earthing of ligbtning system .Because the hull of an FRP ship is built with insulati on material s, a light­
ning sys te m shall be pro vided with earthing arranged to preven t fire s , mechanical dam age or per sonal
injuri es caused by ligh tning shocks .
Th e ins tallation procedures for the lightning sys tem of FRP ships shall be in accordance with the fol­
lowin g requiremen ts, de pendi ng on whether the material s of masts lilted to FRP ships are non-conductiv e
(wood, FRP etc .) or metal (steel, aluminium al loy e tc.), .
(3.1) Non-conductlve masts The spikes shall be copper spikes wit h a diam eter of not less than 12mm and
the spike tip shall protru de at leas t by 15 0mm fro m the mast top so that the ship can be shadow ed within
a cone formed by a line at an angle of 60 degrees wi th the vertic al line incl udi ng the spike tip as far as
practicable.
The earthi ng copper pla tes and the lightning cond uctors of the lightning sys tem shall be installed as
follo w:
(3.1. 1) Earthing copper plates For earth ing copper plates, the requ irem ents of 3.(1 ) (1. 1) app ly co rre­
spondi ngly.
(3.1.2) Lightning cond uc tors
(a) The lightnin g cond uctors shall be of uninsulated stranded copper wires or fiat braided copper wires with
a sectional area of not less than 75mm' .
(b) Th e lightnin g condu ctor s shall be fixed with rive ts or clamped at the upper end s.
(e) When unin sulated coppe r stranded wire s are used as the lightnin g co nduc tors, the uninsulated copper
stranded wires connected to the spike shall be lowered to Ute point at whi ch the shroud leave s Ute mast .
and then led al ong with the shroud and firmly co nnected to Ute earthi ng copper plates with clam ps .
(d) When fiat braided wires are used as lightning conductors, the flat braided wire s connected to thc spike
shall be lowered to the point at whi ch the shro ud leaves the mast and firmly connected to the unin sulated
stranded copper wire s with clam ps, and then the uninsulated strande d copper wires shall be led alon g
with the shroud and firml y connected 10 the earthing co pper pla tes with clamp s.
(e) The lightning conductors shall be installe d straigh t with out connections as far as is practicabl e and shall
not be ben t at a sharp angl e.
(f) The construc tion and material s of clamps shall be recommended to have a serratio n contact and to be of
Referecc Standards:
copper or bras s mate rials so that the y can readil y be clam ped down . It shall no t be connected by solde r­
ing. JIS A 4201 - Protecti on of struct ures agai nst lightn ing (Lightning rods)
lEe 92-401- Electrical installati on s in ships. Pan401: Install ation and test of completed installation

- 54­ - 55 ­
 JIS

F 0 507-1979 F 0507-1979 F 050 7·1 'I "~ I

Applicatio n Standard of Steel Pipes for Small Ships Table 1·2

Unit: mm
Thic'knes.s
1. Scope -
Thi s Jap anese Industri al Standard speci fies the applicatio n sta ndard of steel pipes used for general piping I
Nominal Outs id e
dia. , dia.
Sou ndin g p}pe
Fuel oil tank
Freshwater, hOL
hydr an t water,
Steam and
water. sea water, exha ust pipe for
Tank on [he hull heating and drain etc . 10 kgf/cm' general use Voic e rube
sys tem for small ships. structu re or
Deep wat er/oil
pipe (111 tank ) 10 k. gf/ cm ~
la n k 10 .9 3MPa) 10.9 8 MPaI 01 less
co fferdam or less
Remark: In this standa rd units and numerical valu es in 1 J are in acco rdance with the Iru ema tlcnal System of
Units (SI), and given for reference only. 15A 21.7 - - 2.8 2.8 2.8 -
20A 27 .2 - - 2.9 2.3 2.8 -
2. Application Standard
25 A 34.0 - - 3.4 3.2 3.2 32
Appli ca tion standard ofsteel pipes shall be as given in Tab les 1-1,1-2 ,1-3 , 2-1 and 2-2.

32A 4 2.7 - - 3 .6 3.5 3.5 3 .5

Remarks: l , The di am eter of pipes shall be decided by each regulat io n.
3 .5 3.5 3.5
40 A 4 8.6 3.5 7.1 3.7
2. The le tt er s "-P ' and "- S" o f material symbol Ul the tables mea n the elec t ric resistance welded Heel
pipes and seamless drawn S reel pipes, respecti vely . . 50A 60 .5 3.8 8.7 3.9 3. 8 - 3 .8
65 A 76.3 4.2 6 .0 - 42 - -
80A 89 .1­ - - - 4. 2 - -
Tab le I -I Hull Part
Unitt mm
100A 114.3 - - - 4. 5 - -

Thickness 125A \ 39.8 - - - 4.5 - -

Btldgc pipe Ballast pipe A u pipe 150A 165 .2 - - - - - -

--­
N O!TI maJ Outside Fuel oil tank
Deep w ater /oil
200A 216 .3 - - - - - -
dia. ill a. Ballast tank Tank.on the hu ll
tank excep t Deep wat er /ell Jl S G )45 2­ lIS G 345 2·
I
Ge neral
Deep W3 le r!
General struc m re JIS G 3452­ JI S G 3454­ JI S G 345 4· U S G 3452­
lank SGP-E
Ba Lla~ 1 Tank. or cofferdam SGp ST PG 38-E STPG )8·S SG P-E SGP·E
oil tank
(Seh. 60) an 6 (Seh .40)
Material
I SA 21.7 - - - - - - ns G ) 45 6­
STPT 38-E
20A 27 .2 - - - - - ­ (Seh . 160)
2SA 34 .0 - -
I - - - I -
32 A 42.7 - - - I - -
I
40 A 48 .6 3.5
! ­ - - I - I ­ Table 1-3
50 A 60 .5 3.8 ­ - - 3.8 - Unit: rmn

65A 76 .3 4 .2 I 6 .0
I 4.2
I 6 .0 4.2 6 .0 Thi ckness
30A 89 . L 4. 2 ! 6 .6 4 .1 6 .6 4 .2 6 .6
Scupper pip e
Scup per pipe (Omissible
autom atic non-return valve)
100A i u. s 45 7. L 4.5 6. 0 4 .5 60 No minal Outside Elec tric cable
dia. dia. In case of over­ Pipe under L.W. L.. pipe an weat her
125 A D 9. 3 - - I 4 .5 6.6 4 .5 6.6
Gcncral
Deep wa Ler'
board discha rge
be tween
in case o f pan
150 A 16 5.2 - - 5 .0 7. 1 5.0 7.\ o il tank overboard disch arge
Iree boa rd deck unde r L W.L.
a nd L.W. L.

200A 216 .3
--
-
I - 5. 8
i 8. 2
I 5.8 8.2
15A
2 1.7 - - - .. -
ns G 3454 -
Ma.terial
JI S G 3452-
SGP-E
I
JI S G 3454­
ST PG 38 ·E
(Se h.60)
JI S G 3452·
SG P·E STPG 38-E
{Sch 40-60)
I
~
JlS G 34 52­
SGP·E
j
J1S G 34 54·
STPG 38·E
(Seh.40-60)
20A 27 2 - - - --.
- -
25A 34. 0 - I - - - -
32A 42 .7 - - - - -

40A
43 .6 3.5 - - - 3.5

SOA 60 .S 3.8 - - 3 8

6 5A
76 .3 4 .2 6 .0 7.(' ~ .5 4. 2

80A
89 .1 4.2 6 .6 7.6 11.1 4.2

100 A
ll4 .3 4.5 6 .0 I
X" 13.$ 4.5

125 A 139 .8 4.5 6 .6 Q,5 15.9 4.5

150A
165.2 5.0 7. 1 1 u. o L8.2 5.0

200A 2 16 .3 5.8 - - - $.8

--
ns G 34 52­ Jl S G 3454 ­ Jl S G 3454­ J tS G 34S6- ns G 3452­
STPG 38- E ST PT 38-E SGP-E
Material SGP-E ST PG 38£
(Seh . 4 0-60) (Seh 80) (Seh. 160 ) I

-56 ­ - 57­
F 0507-1979
F 050 7· 19 79
Table 2·2
Table 2- 1 Ma chinery Part Uni!: mm
Unit :mm Thi ckn ess
..
Thickness Tank heating stea m
" - - _
Nominal O utside Hyd rauli c oil pipe or
pipe oi maxim u m maximum working
Com pressed air pipe
d ia. d ia. wOl!cinf pressu re 10 Exhans! gas Pipe
- FI~robov:.~~~ T(~~r
Cooli ng fresh.
wa ter pipe, hy­ kgt7em (0.98 MPal pressure 10 kgf/ cm '
[0 .98 MP. I or I."

Nom inal Outside 10 k gf!cm '

[0 .98 \ IPal
E>eeed in~
10kt,em
ISa tura ted steam
Pipe o f m axi­
oil-pipe
burni ng pu mp
'0
F.e.
d ran t water pi~..
ballast pipe ,
bilge pipe, san i­
F.O. II3.Jlsfer
pipe . F.O. pipe,
F.e. dr ein pipe, 15A 21.7
or less

2.8 2.8 2.8 -

dla . dia. mum working boiler blow-ocf tar y pipe. fresh­ L.O. tra nsfer
or less ~0 .9 MP' I pressure 10 pipe, L.O. d rain
o kgf/e m J kgf/e Ul' [0 .9 8
pipe ex ceed ing
max . \\o nll; ' t:
water pipe,
pipe. mist pipe of
20A 27.2 2.9 2.8 2.8 -
[2 .94 MP,) drin king wat er
Mfa j or I"" . pre ssure l ~flcm' pipe fee d wate r maximum work-
or less drain pipe [0.98 Mf,l. pipe of maximum m g pressure. 10
25A 34.0 3.4 3.2 3.2 -
boil er wa ter cir­ kgflcrn' [0.98
cula tfng pipe iOk~~~~~el~~8 MPa] or less 32A 42.7 36 3.S 3 .5 -
MPa ) or less 40A 48.6 3.7 3.5 3.5 -
15A 21.7 28 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8
50A 60 .5 3.9 3.8 3.8 -
20A
27.2 2.8 2.9 2.8 2.9 2.8 2.8
6SA 76.3 - 4.2 4.2 -
25A
34.0 3.2 3A 3 .2 3 .4 3.2 3.2
80A 89.1 - 4.2 4.2 -
32A
42 .7 3.5 3.6 3_5 3.6 3 .3 3.5

100A
I
)14 .3 - 4.5 4.5 -
40A
48.6 3.3 3 .7 }.5 3 .7 3.5 3.3

12SA L39.8 - 4.5 45 -

30A
60 .5 3.8 3.9 3.8 3 .9
150A L56 .2 - 5 .0 5.0 -
3.8 3.8

200A 216 .3 - 5 .8 5. 8 -
65 A
76.3 4.2 3.2 4.2 5.2 4.2 4.2

80A

250 A 267. 4 - - 6.6 -

89.1 4.2 5.5 4.2 5.5
100 A
1 14.3 4.5
4.2 4.2
300A 318 .5 - - 6. 9 -
6 .0 4 .5 6 .0 4.5 4.5 350A 355 .6 - - 7.9 6.0
125A 139 .8 4.5 6 .6 4.5 - 4.5 4.$ 4 00A 406 .4 - - 7.9 6 .0
I SOA 16 5.2 5.0 7. 1 i 5.0 - 5.0 5_0 450A 45 7.2 - - 7.9 6 .0
200 A 216 .3 - - 5.8 3.8
SOOA 508.0 - - 7.9 6.0

250 A 267.4 - - - - 6 .6 I 550A 538.8 - - - 6 .0

300A 3 18.5 - - - 600A 609 .6 - - - 6 .0

6.9 - 6 50A 660. 4 - - - 6 .0
Materia l
JlS G >452­ ns G 3454· JlS G 345 2· JlS G 34 54­ JlS G 3452 · J IS G 345 2·
SGP-E STPG 38-S
(Seh. 40)
SGP·E STPG 38·S
(Seh. 40)
SGP-E SGP·E 700A 71 1.2 - - - 6.0

750A 762 .0 - - - 6.4

800 A 812.8 - - - 6 .4

850 A 863.6 - - - 6.4

-­ - -
900A 9 14.4 - - - i>.-l

1000A 10 L6 .0 - - - 8.7

JIS G 3454· 1IS G 3452­ JIS G 3452 - JlS G 3457 ·

Mat erial s STPG 38·S SGP-E SGP·E ST PY 41
(Seh. 40)

Nolt~ : The thic kness Sh3U be 4 .5- 7 0 mm, in case o r using steel pla te weld ed pipes for ex haust gas p ip e.

Reference S tandards :
TIS G 3 4 52 - Ca rbo n St e el Pipe s for Ordi na ry Pi p in g
JIS G 3454 - Ca rbo n S t eel Pip es for Pr essur e Service
Jl S G 3 4 56 - Ca rbo n Stee l PIp es fo r High T empe rat ure Servi ce
lIS G 3 457 - Arc Weld ed Carbon S tee l Pip e s

- 58 ­ - 59 ­
 JIS
F0809-1991
F 0809· 1991 F 080').19')I

Ships' s teering gea r - Test m ethod at sea tri al

Table 1
I. Scope This Japanese Industrial Stan dard specifies the test method for stee rin g gear durin g sea trials of (1) One hydraulic pump
ships.

Re mark :
This Standard specifies the general test methods for ships eq uipped with ordinary electro­ COnlIOt system NO. 1 NO.2(')

hydraulic steering gear s. If the requ irements in this Standard are diffi cult to comp ly with due Steering method
to the size of a ship , ope rating areas of a ship, and type of steeri ng gear , it shall be applied COr.
respondingly LO the requirements speci fied . .

2, Types of tests The types of teSIS for steering ge ar shall be as foll ows:
(I )Steering performance test of main steering gear
(2) Steering performance test of auxiliary steering gear NOlen n tis applies 10 the dual controlsystem setup.
(3) Operating Test of power sys tem including the transfe r fun ction of the power systems
(4) Isolation test of one single hydraulic dri ve sy stem (2) Two hydi aulic pump s: Ea ch has thc specified main steering capac ity (O ne pump stand­
(5) Power suppl y test from a stan dby elec tric souree by system )
(6) Operating test of thc control appar atus including transfer tests between two se ts of independent con trol sys ­
tems
Control system NO.1 NO.2
(7) Operating test of the control apparatus including transfer tes ts between the control syste m and the co ntrol
apparatus pro vided in the steeri ng gear compartm ent H ydrauli c pump NO.J NO.2
(8) Test of oil rep lenis hing device of the hydraulic drive system Steering method POr! .35' 35' 35'

\f\; <:
(9) Operating test of the communica tions system between the whe elhouse and stee ring gear compartme nt
(10) Performance tests of alarm systems, rudd er angle indica tors and running indica tors of the power system
(11) Operating lest of the control apparatus including the tran sfer tests between au tomati c stee ri ng and manu al
steering 35' 35' 35·
(U) Operating test of safety devices Starboard
(13) Verification test of rudder Jock de vices

(3) Two hydraulic pumps: The sum of the two has the speci fied main steerin g c apac ity
3, Test m eth od
(Pump parallel running sys te m)
3.1. Stee ring p erforman ce tes t of main stee ri ng gea r The test shall be carried out by steering the rudder
from 35 degree s on one side to 35 degrees on the other side, while the ship , full loaded 10 the Summer Con trol system NO. 1 NO.2
load line , is going ahead with the main engine running at the maximum continuous output, and it shal l be Hydr auli c pump NO. l &NO.2 NO.l &NO.2
verified that the specified steering time from 35 degrees On one side to 30 degree s on the other side is not
exceeded.
The typical combinations of tests in comm on wi th the contro l sys tem resc spec ified in 3.6 acco rdi ng to
the system setup of the hydr aul ic pump are given in Table 1. Wh en the test cannot be carri ed out with the
Steering method
V\;0. f\j\ ,
POr! 35' 35' 35'

full loaded condi tiou of a ship , it may be carri ed out under ano ther suita ble load ed co ndi tion. 35' 35' JS'
Starboard

3.2 Stee r ing performanee test of auxi liary stee r ing gear Th e test shall be carried out by pu tl ~ng I e. ~d.
der from 15 de gree s on one side (0 15 degrees on the ot her side. while the Ship. fullloo.d ~d dra t I co ndition,
is going ahead at a speed o f 1/2 of the full speed dev eloped with the mai n .engine runm ng til ~h e maxJm~m
continuous o utp ut or 7 kno ts, whi chever is greater, and it shall be verifie d that the speci fied steering
motion can be co mp leted w ithi n the-specified time . .. . .
The typical co m bina tio ns of test in common wilh the contro l system test speci fied to 3.7. accor~n g to
the system se tup of the hydraulic pu mp are given in Table 2. When the test canno t be carri ed Out In the
full loaded draft co ndition of a ship, it may be carried 0111 unde r allo t her SUitable loaded condi tio n of the
ship .

- 60­
- 6 1­
 F 0809·1991
F0809·199t

Table 2 rrol syste m, one or these hydraul ic pumps shall be stopped with Ihe pow er syste m and the hydr aulic
(1) Auxiliary steering gear leSI in case of the main stee ring gear with one hydraulic pump pipe lines in service iso lated by valve operatio ns. whereby it shall be veri fied if the o ther hydr aulic
drive sys tem is operable.
Typeof auxiliary Po wer-driven aux iliary
steering gear hydraulic pump Manual auxiliary hydraulic pump
12) In ca se o r oil car rie rs , liquefied gases bulk carrier s and dangerous c he m icals bulk carriers with a
Control system Local control equiprneur in the gross tonnage of 10,000 tons and over
steering gear compartme nt (a) In case of th e main steering gear ha vin g two selS of in de pe nde n t and separate hydraulic dri ve
Steering method Pon sys te ms and the speci fie d m a in stee r ing ca pa bi lity wit h either o ne. Wh en ei ther No .1 Or No .2
hydra ulic dri ve sys tem is running, the hydra ulic drive system in operatio n shall be se para ted, the ot her
hydr au lic dri ve sys tem shall be ope rated , a nd its operable condition shall be verified.
Starbo ard (b) In case o f Ihe main steering gea r ha vin g two se ll of hydrau lic dri ve sys te ms of e q ua l capacity,
and th e spec ified m ain stee ri ng capability b)' runn ing either one o f hydraulic pum ps. When either
NO.1 or NO. 2 hydr auli c pump is running with either No .1 or No.2 control syste m. a low oil le vel co n­
dition shal l be cre ated by man ipulatin g the le vel switch of the oil lank, whe reby it sha ll be verified if
(2) If the .main steeri ng gear co mprises two hydrauli c pump s, eac h with the specified main steering the hydr aul ic dr ive system or the power system a nd the hyd raulic pipe lines in service are isolated
capa ~Jty (o ne pump standby sys tem), Or the sum o f those onrputs corr espond s [0 the specified autornatically, and the o ther h ydranlic driv e syste m beco mes read y for operanon,
steerin g capaClt~ (pu rrtp par allel running system), the provisions of the auxiliary steering gear (c) In case of th e ma in s tee r ing gea r having two se ts of hydraulic drive systems of eq ua l capacity,
may ~OL be req Ulre~for eac h .o f these eases . In these cases teSLS shall be carri ed o ul to veri fy the and th e sp ecifi ed main stee ring capability by running a ll bydraulic pumps. When bo th No.1 and
capacity of the au xiliary steen ng gea r specified in 3.7. No. 2 hyd raulic pum p is runn ing with ei ther No .1 or No.2 control sys te m. a low oil level co ndi tio n
shall be crea ted by manipulating the level switch o f rhe oil tank, whereb y it shall be verified i f rhe
Tes LS to veri fy the a uxiliary steering capacity. hydraulic drive system or the power system and the hydr aulic p ipe lines in servi ee are isolated auto ­
rnai ically, and the o ther hydranli c dri ve sys tem becom es ready for ope ration.

Control system Local control system wiLhin the steering gear compartment 3.5 Power supply test from s ta nd by electric source T he lest shall be carri e d out to veri fy that standby
Hydraulic pump NO.1 NO.2
elec tric power (generally, usin g emerge nc y ge nera lor) a t the time o f the main power bla ckout can be sup­
plied automatical ly within the speci fied peri od to the power system, the contro l system connecte d 10 the
Steering method
Pan

\Iv JV\
pow er sys tem and the helm indica tor.

3.6 Operating tes t of conlrol a pparatus including transfer test betwe en tw o sets of control syst ems
The tesr shall be carri ed om to veri fy the operatingcond itio n of L1,e control sys tem du ring the main steer­
Star board 15' 15' 15' ing gear per formance test or the auxiliary steeriug gear perform ance iesr,

3.3 Operating test of power system including power syste m transfer function Tbe lest shall be carried
out 10 verify the functio ns o f the power system includi ng the power system tran sfer funct ion whe n the
steenng performance tes t of the main steeri ng gear or the auxiliary steering gear is carrie d Out
T est ~ f an iso la te~ b! d r aulic d.r ivc sys tem This lest shall be carrie d out to veri fy if the steeri ng
capacity can be main tained or rap idly restored by isolating the failu re part when a single failure occurs in
one .of the powe r sys tems or in the piping lin e. For the steerin g gear o f oil carri ers . liquefied gases bulk
earners, ~d dangerous che micals bulk carriers, with a gr oss to nnage of 10 .000 Ions and over, however.
the foll? wmg te sl~ shal l be carri ed ~u t 10 verify if the steeri ng capability can be restored within the specl­
fi ed peri od ~ hen '~ IS lost due to a single failu re of part of the hydraulic dri ve sys tem o f the main steeriug
gear (excluding fatlures of the tiller, quadrant, and sticks of the rudd er ac tuaror).
(I ) Ships other than oil carriers, liqu efied gases bulk carrier s, and dang erous chemical s bulk carriers of
a g ross tonnage of 10,000 ton s and over
(a) ~n case o~ the main steering gea r comprising two hydraulic pumps eac h with the speeified st eer­
mg capacity (one pump sta ndb y syst em ) W hen the steeri ng gear is runn ing under the combinatio n of
No.1 Or No.2 hydrauli c pum p using No. I or No. 2 co ntrol system, the pump shal l be s topped with the
pow er syste m and t.he hydrauli c pipe :ines in serv ice isolat ed by valve operati o ns. Another pump shall
then be s tarted and It shall be veri fied if the pump is ope rab le.
(b) In case of t~e main steeri~g gear c~m p r is in ~ two hydraulic pumps and th e sum o r two pumps
~rrespo.ndmg .to the specified s tee ri n g capacity (pum p parallel running syst em ) When the steer.
mg gear IS runmng und er the com bination of No . I and No . 2 hydraulic pump u sing NO. 1 or No.2 con­
3.7 Operating test of co n trol apparatus including tra nsf er test between th e control syst em and th e local
con trol a pparatu s provid ed in th e stee ri ng ge a r compartment The tes t shal l be carried OuI to verify
the operating co nditio ns of the con trol apparatu s du ring the auxiliary stee ring gear pe rfo rman ce tes t,
3.8 Test of oil replenishing syste m of hydraulic d ri ve syst em Th e test shal l be carri ed Out to verify that
the hydrauli c driv e syste m can be repleni shed with oil from au oil rese rve tank by a suitable means, and
may be carrie d OU t while the ship is at the time of moorin g or docking .
3.9 Op erating test of communieatlons system betw een t he wh eelhouse a nd the s tee ring gea r com pa rt·
me nt The test shall be carri ed out 10 verify the opera ting conditi on of tile 'communications system,
and may be carried Out while the ship is a t the time o f moorin g or docking.
3.10 Performance test s of a la r m d evi ce s. rudder angle indicat ors and runnin g in dica to r s of p ower
system The tests shall be carri ed out 10 verify ope ratio ns and indica tio ns, an d may be carri e d Out while
the ship is at the time of moorin g or docking..
3.11 Op eratin g test of co n tr ol apparatus including t ransfe r tes ts betw een automatic steering and manual
ste e r ing The rest shall be carri ed Out 10 veri fy the tra nsfer function (if auto pilot is provided ) and oper­
ations of eac h control system.
3.12 Operating tesl of sa rely devices The test shall be carrie d oul to verify the pr oper operation s of the
safe ty de vices suc h as the ove rpressure relief valves, and may be c arrie d out while the ship is ar the time
of moorin g or docking.

- 62 ­ -63 ­
F 0809-1991 F 0809-t9') I

3.13 Verification test of rudd er lock devices The test shall be carried out to verify if the lock devices stop Tabl e 6
me monon of the rudder effectively. and may be carried out while me ship is at me lime of mooring.
Measuring items Acceptancecriteria
(a) In case of the main steerin g gear having Wow n 45 seconds
4. Measuring items and acceptan ce cr iteri a
twOsets of lndependenr andseparate
hydraulic drive systems, and me specified
4.1 Steer i.ng pe~orma~ce test of main steering gea r The measuring items of me steering performance main steering capability with either One.
lest of me mam steering gear and acceptance criteria shall be as given in Table 3. The period from being isolated until
restoration to a condition in being
Tabl e 3 ready for operations,
(b) In case of me mainSteering gear having
Measuring irerns twOhydraulic drive systems of equal
(l) Period fro m hardover 10 hard Over capacity. and<he specified main 'leering
The period from 35 degreesOn One SIde Willlln 28 seconds C3pabiU<ywith each hydraulic pump.
to 30 degree' on the otherside The periodfrombeing autormticall y
isoIaled unal restorarion to a condition
Not more (han the maximum III beingready for operations,
workingpressure
c) In case of themain steering gear
Not more thanthe amperage having two SClSof hydraulic dnve
(3l Maximum am perage of electricmotor specified for the electric malar systemsof equalcapacity, and the
specified main steeringC3pability
by running all hydraullc pumps.
4.2 Steering performance test of auxiliary steering gear The measuring items of me steering perfor­ Thepenod frombeingaurormtically
mance test of \he auxiliary steering gear and acceptance criteria shall be as given in Table 4. isolared until becoming operable
co rdi uon
Tabl e 4

Measuring items Acceptance criteria

4.5 Power su pply test from sta nd by etectr ic source The measuring items and acceptance criteria for the
(I ) Periodfrom hard over to hard over power supply test from standby electric source shall be as given in Table 7.
The periodfrom 15 degrees on one side WiUun 60 seconds
to 15 degrees on the other side
Tab le 7
Not more than Lhe maximum
(2) Maximum hydraulk pressure working pressure
Measuring items Acceptancecriteria
Notmore tha" the amperage The period fromblackout of the main Within45 seconds
(3) Maximu m amperage of electric motor specified for the electric rnoror
power until restorationof steering
capabilitybystandbyelectricpower
4.3 Operating test of power system includ ing tr ansfer function between power systems The test shall
be carried out to verify if all operations of me power system inelduing the transfer function between me
4,6 Operating test of control apparatus including transfer test of two sets of control system The oper­
power systems are satisfactory. aring test shall be carried out 10 verify mat all operations are satisfactory.

4.4 ISOlati on test or one hydraulic drive system Operating test of control a ppa ra tus includin g transfer test between control system and the control
4.7
(1) The verificarion items for me isolation test of one hydraulic drive system for ships other man oil carriers, a ppar atus pro vided in the steering gear compartment The operating test shall be carried om to ver­
liquefied gases bulk carriers, and dangerous chemicals bulk carriers with a gross tonnage of 10,000 tons ify mal all operations are satisfactory.
and over shall be as given in Table 5.
4.8 Test of rep lenishing system for hyd ra ulic dr ive system The test shall be carried OUL to verify that
Table 5 the oil replenishing operation is satisfactory.
System Verification items
4.9 Operatin g test of communications system between the wheelhouse and the steering gea r compart­
(aj Onepumpstandby system Shall be capableof rapidly isolating and ment The operating rest shall be carried out LO verify mat the communicating condition is satisfactory.
restoring 10 a condition in W h1Ch it is ready
10 operate
4.10 Performance tests of alarm devices, rudder a ngle indicators and running ind ica tors of power
(b) Pump parallel running system Shall be capable of rapidly isolating and system The perforrnance tests shall be carried out to verify that all operations are satisfactory.
maintaining a eondidcn in which it is ready
rooperare.
4.11 Operating test of control apparatus including transfer between aut omatic steering and manual
steering The measuring items and acceptance criteria shall be as given in Table 8.
(2) The measuring items and acceptance criteria for me isolation test of one power system for oil carriers, liq­
uefied gases bulk carriers. dangerous chemicals bulk carriers with a gross tonnage of 10,000 tons and over
shall be as given in Tab le 6.

- 64 ­ - 65 ­
 JIS

FOS09 -J991
F 0905-1981

Ta b le 8 Measurement o f N o ise Leve l on Board Vessels

Measuring items Acceptance criteria (A c conun od a ti on Part)

11,e period required for transferring Shall be within 3 seconds for
from automatic steermg to manual lUX more chan twO auernpts
steering (if auto pilot is provided) at an optional rudder angle. I . Sco pe
Thi s J apanese Indu strial Standard spec ifles the measu rem en t of noise level on boa rd me rchant ships
4.12 Oper ating tes t of sa fety d evice s Th e operatiug Lest shall 6e carrie d o ut to ve rify thai the o pera tion of (acco mmodation part) when cr uisin g a t sea .
safety device s is sa tisfac tory.
2 . Purpose of Measurement
4.13 Verification tes t of rud de r lock d evices The verification test shal l be carried out to verify if the rud­ The meas uremen t is perfo rmed t o diagnose the noise le vels in acco mmod ation un de r ope rati ng condition
der c an be re liably lock ed . of so und sources when cruisin g at sea.

5. R ecords The Lest results shall be rec orde d in a ccordance with the proced ure agree d upon between the
parti es co nce rn ed . In the re cord s, the o pera ting co ndit ions o f the ship (dra ug hts. shi p's spee d, sea and
wea ther condition s) shall be e ntered .
3. Conditions of Measurement
3.1 Ship 's Con dit io ns Slup sh all be unde r balla st ed Or fully loaded cond it io n , and goin g str aight ahea d at
sea.
3.2 Run ning Condit ions of Machinery Th e main engine shall be under nor mal output , and auxiliary
machinery and e qui pme nt nece ssary for no rmal voya ge and eq ui pme nt conti nuo usly used at normal voyage
condi tio ns shall be under normal o pera lion .
It is desirable thal mac hinery and equipment which are int erm itt ently o perated sho uld be und er sto pping
condit ion.
3.3 Conditions of Accommodation Com partments
3.3.1 Do ors and windo ws in vario us ro oms of so und so urces shall be closed be fo re measurement .
Examples: Doors, windo ws, etc. oi mach inery space. sletr mg gear room. fan unit room , radio room, galley.
etc .
3.3.2 The doors and wind ow s in the rooms co nce rne d for noise measm emen t sha ll be close d , while
[o r the doors in stee ring gear room , measur em ent shall be perfor med un der two co ndit ions, i.e . closed and op ened
on the leew ard side .
Fo r the do o rs provided with venet ian lo uvres, th e shut ters o f venetia u louvres shall be ope ne d .
The doors and windows in ea ch room within acco mmodation other than the roo m concerned for noise
measmemen t shall be also closed .
3.3 .3 Th e air vent unit (ai r con ditioni ng unit) of the rOO rTIs conce rned for noi se measu reme nt ' hal l be
at norm al co nd ition whe re designed ve ntil ating air qu ant it y will be discharged .
33.4 Th e roo ms concerned for noise measur em en t shall no t be o ccu pied by any pe rsonne ls.
Where it is impossible to get rid of presonnels , silence shall be required LO the oc cupa nts , and nu m ber of
personne ls stayed in Ute very roo ms shall b e noted On the rema rk col umn s in the measuremen t results.

4 . Measurin g Pro cedures

4.1 Instruments
4.1.1 The ordinary so und leve l meters specified in JI S C 1502 o r precision sound level mete rs in JI S C
1505 or the eq uivalent s shall be used .
Fo r frequ ency analyze rs, oc tave-b and an alyze rs shall be used .
4 .1.2 Th e instru ments shall be the ones whi ch have passed the tests in accordance with Measur em ent
Rule , and shall be within e ffective period .

- 66 ­ - 67 ­
F 09 05 ·19 81 F 090S·1981

4.2 Presenl ation of Corr ecti on Clrcnit to Sensitivity of Hum an Ear and Measured Values 5. Measuring Place
4 .2.1 Measurement The measureme n t shall, as a rule, be per formed a t noise levels, but freq uency 5.1 Th e place where must be measured ' hall, as a rule , be as follows:
analy sis sh all be performed at especially required porti on s.
(1) AJl living room s (incl udi ng bed ro oms) On each deck level.
4.2.2 Noise Levels Th e noise levels shall be applicable 10 Avweightin g of co rrec tion circuit 10 sens i tivity
(2) Cen ter of ea ch pas sage o n each deck level.
o f hum an ear and the measured values shall be exp ressed in dB (A).
(3) Hospital
4.2.3 frequency Anal ysis Th e frequ ency analy sis shall be acco rded 10 e ither A·welghlmg Or Cvweight­
ing and to octave band analy sis on the basis of the cen ter frequen cy as given in Tabl e I . (4) Sound gener ating equipment room (equipment room havin g loud sound sour ce like ran unit room
The measured values shall be expressed in dB, and th e name of weighting used shall be written in ( for air condit io nin g installation) .
following dB. (5) Steerin g room .
5.2 The places whi ch are measured as requ ired shall be as follow s:
Tabl e I Octave-band center frequency
(1) Each dining room , smokin g room a nd recreati on room (in cluding reading ro om) .
Ceruer frequency Hz (3 1 S) 63 ) 25 I 250 I 500 I 1000 2000 4000 8000 (2) Work ro om (R adi o ro om , contr ol room , dispensary galley , etc.).
(3) Vario us offices .
Remark : 3 1 S Hz. in ( ) is applicable 10 (he measuremen t ....'here required .
(4) Neighbo uring room to sound so urce room .
4 .3 Dynamic Chara cteristics and Reading of Indicated Values (5) Steerin g gear roo m .
4 .3.1 Dynamic Chara cteristics Fa. dyn ami c cha racteristics, "S LOW" shall, as a rule , be used . (6) Passage adjacent to en gine casin g o f ma chine ry space .
4 .3.2 Reading of Indic ated Valu es At e ach poin I where 10 me asu re, j( shall be me asured for five (7) The place s wher e personnels frequ ently pass thr ough or slay, e.g. b ridge wings near supply and
second s at least.
exh aust in machin ery space/s wim ming po ol a u exp osed deck .
When differen ces between the maximum and minimum ind icati on are much grea te r, they shall be clar ified
and the indi cat ed values shall be given by frequen cy-weighing average. Fa. num eri cal valnes, fraction s o f 5 (8) Oth er places .
and over o f tenth's pla ce shall be co unted as a uni t and the rest shall be cut away , then int e ger val ues shall be 5.3 Th e plaees for frequ enc y anal ysis sh all, as a rule , be as follows:
reco rde d .
(1) Sound genera tin g room .
In this case, the pre sent a tion shall be as given in example .
(2) Th c rooms wher e measur ed so un d levels exceed limit value or design e d target value .
Ex am ple:
I l
58 (53. 69) dB (A)
IL- maximum level (3) living roo ms at four corners on each de ck level.
I _ -___
~ minimum level (4) Ot her places especially required.
=- - - - - - frcquency.weighing average
6. Meth od t o Summarize Results of Measurements
( not necessarily lhe average of maxim um Ie""el and minimu m level) 6.1 Th e me tho d to summa rize results o f measur em ents shall be as given in A n aehed Tables I to 4 . Howe ver ,
4.4 Applica tio u of Microphone where anal ysis result s o f frequen cy is illustrated, those mea sured on the basis o fC-weighting ' hall be su mm a ri ~ d
in acco rdance with the Attached Table 3 , while th ose measur ed on th e basis o f A·weighling iu acco rdance with
4.4.1 The h eigh I of mic ro pho ne sha ll, as a rule , be 1.2 to 1.5 m from lite floor.
the Attached Table 4 .
4.4 .2 The directi on and posinon of mlcrophoue shall , as a rule, be as giveu in the follow ing procedures.
6.2 Th e measured place s cor respo nding 10 the measur em ent result s in 6.1 shall be indicated for identifi­
(I) The measuring point shall be One for each room , and it s location shall be nea r Ihe center cation with position numbers in Gen eral Arrangement o r Room Plans , and their positi on numbers shall be marked
of the room , and the dir ecti on of microphon e shall be upward conside ring it s dir ecti vity. near the measur ed positi on s .
Ho wever, it may be hori zon tal de pendin g a u the cons truc tion o f micro pho ne . In thi s It is recommended that the Ge neral Arrangement Or Room Plan s co ntains dimensional in format ion , and
ca se, the microph one shall be direc ted toward the entrance door . expli city indicates at leas t door , furniture , windo ws.ere.
Fo r thc roo m of special form or esp eciall y large space or else, whe re tlte measuremen t
at tw o or m ore poin ts pel toom is required .the int ervals of meas uring poin ts shal l be 2 m
Or mo re apart each ot he r, and shall be a l least 0.5 01 apart fro m the refl ecti on surf ace
(ce iling , Wall , floor .doo r, large-sized furniture) .
(2) Th e meas uremen t in the so uud-generat ing equipmen t roo m and exposed pan , the micro . Reference Standards :
phon e shall be directed to ward sound source .
J1S C 1502 - Sound Leve l Meters
(3) Th e measuring point shall be abo ut I In ap art fro m air ou tlet to avoid the di rect effect JIS C 1505 - Preci sion So und Level Meters
o f ven tila ting air ou tlet , and cau tion shall be given so th at the ventilation ail may nor
directl y blow against Lite micr oph one . Related Standards:
4.4.3 Where the measurement is performed at th e place affe cted by wind , the micr o phone shall be ISO R 22 6 _ No rmal equal-l oudness con to urs fa. pure ton es and normal thr eshold o f hea rin g under
provid ed wit h wind screen , o r the measurement shall be performe d at leew ard side. free field listening conditions
4 .4.4 \'ih en dynamic microphone is used, cautio ns shall be given espec ially on magneti c field (elec tric ISO R 199 6 _ Acoustics-Assessment o f noi se with respect to community respon se

mot or , tran sformer , etc .) ISO 2923

_ Accu sti es-Measur eme nt of noise on board vessels .

IEC Pub. 123 - Recom men dation s for Sound Level Meters

IEC Pu b . 179 - Pre cision Sou nd Level Mete rs

IEC Pub . 22 5
_ Octa ve , Half-Octa ve an d Third-O ctave Band Fillers lnte ude d fo r the Analysis of Soun ds
an d Vtbratlon s

- 68­ - 69 ­
 F 0905 ·1'1}i1
F 0905· 198 1
S. No.
Attach ed Table 1

S. No. Sound Level Measurement Da (3

Nameof ship
I Measurer I
,---.:
I Tonna ge 1 DWT GT

Date and time

ven tilatio n fan

I Ship's condition

f WeaLheI
I
I
NO R · MeR · M/ E STOP (

II Sea sUt e
,-­
)i B ALLAST. FULL DRAFT

11 Wllld Veloci ty ' ,

( ~~t m)

mi ·'
' Sound level met", ! --' I Applicable
standard
I
Appli cable I
\- lumuments
I Octavo-band analy>cr I I standard ._ _

1,- - ­- . P'.u1:icuM I -- Runrung co nditio n jl Remarks I

[tern IQu ant. 1 Capacity Quant j Condition _

w
iI TYj>e
M.C.R. I Ii
!
PS CkW) rpm
I
­I
I
,I PS CkW) 'I'm
I
~ !
Normaloulput PS [kW ) r ,p~ . \ _ j__ __ _.__
Twbo charger of mainengine ]
(onl y diesel ship)
1 ...... e
I ',1'
II
- Propelle, . r - I '~~:;f::- -- ' ---­1- -1 -­- --- -- - - -.. . --­ -.--- - ­
Generator
1 T /G
_
1--1-­ kW rpm I ; _
'­ 1- - ­!
1 1O/G
• I I - kW rpm I
, I ,
1 ._
I
.
I ~~~ti~ ~ce ~;- I
Supply I
--­ -,­ ;I-----­ -- --1- ·­
I

NJ: compressor I I - - ,-1 -­!- -­-- -

Air conditioner .­ - j- . A
_ --­- I~ - -\"---.­
~.

'­ 1-­---- ­_·­·- --­ -: i- -- '" - .- .. I

_ ____I _J
---.. ­--­ ·-­-. _ ----'----'---_
I- I--- ­ _--·-·-- . - ·!­ -
- - - -­--- .._ --_ ....._- - -_. _- ~-- "- - -­
Relative location betwee n accommodation and machinery apace ~ Sound attenuating measures to be specially noted .
(Number of tiers or accommodatio n and deck height shall be also
noted ) - -e
-­ --'1-­ -­ --i--­ - ;-\--1- ­ "--- -­ -- - -\- -
I
I
I
I I
.5 I \ I
fl.
if;: I
I I
~
I
~
I I

I I
I I , i i I 1
I

' ~ ; ci
~-=Z - \ I I.. I
I
i I I I rI \ I I I I
~03a

-70 - - 71 -
 F 0905 ·19 81
F 0905 ·1981
Attached Table 4

Attached Table 3

S.No. I d B ( C) S.No.

Position No. ( ) Me3 ~urillg Point : i d B ( A) -I

Position No . ( ) Measuring Point:

/20

110

I
100

I
I

q0 I

-et
W 8
0
I

."
I

~
~ 0 I

<Xl -e
-e ;;
."
~
-e
~
;:;
0 60

I
I

;;

5
8

0 - ,

4
0
I

I
I

I
I

2
0
13/.5 ) 63 J25 250 500 1000 2000 4.000 8000

~ ~ Octav e-band center freque ncy Hz

~m
0"0

Oct ave. band cente r frequency Hz.

-72 ­ - 73 ­
 lIS

F 0907-[990
F 090 7·1 990 F 0907-1990

Guidelines for O verall E valuation of V ibration in T he three region s shown in Figure repr esent, in the asce ndi ng orde r. the "e nv l ro n me n ~ o f ~ull vib ~at io n
Accommodation P art of Merchant Ships w hic h is highl y like ly 10 ca use co mplaints for livin g co mfor t" , " e nv i ro ~ me nt ? f h.ull vi br at ion wh ich IS
norm ally expe rien ced and is acceptable", and "e nviro nme nt of hull vibration which IS leas t like ly to ca use
complaints for living com fort ."
1. Scop e
Remark : 111 lhi s nomogram. the presentation of the irucn su y of vibration is made in terms or vibration
Th is Jap anese Ind us tria l Standar d speci fies the guideli nes for ove ra ll eval ua tion of vibra tio n in the velocity ( \I) , in which the relationship between dlsp laccmcm (D) andacceleration (A) is expressed
acco mmodatio n space of merchant ships i n the sea trial cond ition. by the Iollow mg equation using 3 param ete r of frequency (J)"

Remark ..: 1, Thi s standard ls nOI intended to spec ify stand ard s for me acceptance tests and Inspecti on of A
machinery and equipment for marine use. V = 2lt/D = 2 nJ
2. Sh rps co nside red in t his sta ndard arc merch ant sh ips with a len gth of 1O0 til or marc
irrespective of the type of propulsion machinery.
where
The applicabl e.freq ue ncy range 'hall be within I - 100 Hz. V: vibrat ion ve loc ity (rnrn/s)
3. This s tandard gives. guidelines for relative ev aluation of v ibration , and doe s nor specify J: freq uency (Hz )
permiss ible values.
0: di splace me nt (mm)
2. Definitions
A: acce leration (mm/s 2 )

For the pu rpose of this standard, the following definitions apply in addition 10 those spe cified in JIS B Eve n in case s where the meas ured value involve s di splacem ent s or acce lera tion , it is therefore possible that
0153 and JIS F 0012 : evaluati on of vibrarion is made by using this equation converti ng the m into velocity. or direc t e valua tion of
(1) vibration is made by using rhe nomogram show n in the figu re, in which d isplacemen ts are eva luated by the
Peak va lue The maximum value from among plural amplitudes (acceleration, velocity or disp lace.
right-hand up diagram, and aeee lera rions by the right-hand down d iagram .
ment ) obtained fOTeach freque ncy co mponent throu gh freq uency anal yses.
(2) Narrow ba n d anal ys is Freq ue ncy a nalysis usin g an aly zing eq uipme nt wi th a narr ow ban d
width.

3. M easuring Met ho ds for t he E valuation of Vib ra t ion

3,1 M ea suring Conditions Measuring co nd itions shall be as follows:
(1) Sh ip 's cond ition s A ship runni ng stra igh t in sea trials on a cal m wa ter, whic h is eithe r in ballast
or in a fuJI lo ad condi tion.
(2) Op era ting condition of mach in ery Propulsion machin e ry runn ing at its ra ted normal ou tput
wi th esse ruial auxi liary mach inery for prop ulsio n and miscell aneou s ot her equipment whie h is used
co ntin uo us ly in ordi na ry naviga tion o pe ra ted nor mall y. Equi p men t w hi c h is used on an Refer en ce Sta n da rds:
intermi ttent mode of operation shou ld prefe rab ly be kept OUl of operation when measurements of
vibration are being taken , J IS B 0153 - G lossary of Terms Used in Mec hanica l Vib ration and Shock .

JIS F 0012 - Glossa ry of Term s for Shipb uilding (H ull Part-Construction)

3,2 M easuring In struments For vib ra tion measur em ents, well calibra ted analog ue instr ume nt s of
k nown measur ing accu racy, whose o urpnrs proportio na l to acce lera tion . veloc ity or d isplace ment are linear
within the range of freq ue ncies to be measured for eval ua tion, Related Standards:

3.3 Measuring P o ints and Pr ocednre Measureme nts of v ibratio n sho uld prefe rab ly be tak en in Measureme nt of Noise Lev el on Board Ve sse ls (Acco mmoda tion Part)
JIS F 0905 -
vertical, longi tudinal and tran sverse directions at spaces normally occu pied by crew me mbers (wheel room . A llowable Val ue o f Vibra tion for S hips Machiner y
JI S F 0906 - .
livi ng q uarters. dining roo m, engine control roo m, e tc.). ISO 1631/1-Evaluation of human e xpos ure to whole- body vibration - Pan I: Gener al requireme nts
I SO 48 67 -
Co de fo r the meas ure ment and re porting of shipboard v ibration dat a
3.4 Vi bra t ion Measurem en ts a nd Presentation of Mea sur ed Valu es Th e meas ure ments of vibra tion ISO 4868 - Co de for the measur em en t and reponi ng of local vibra tion data o f s hip s tru ctures and
and present ation of measured val nes ahal l be as follows :
eq uipment . . . .
(1) M ea sure ments 11 is recom men ded th at meas ure ments be taken for a t lea st 30 seconds , ISO 6954 - Mech ani cal VIbra tion and shoc k - G uideline s for the ove rall eva luatio n of vibra tion In
prefe rably for app roxi ma tely one minu te. merc hant ships
(2) Pr esentation of measured va lnes T he pre sentation of measured values shall be made by the
peak v a lues of eac h f re quency co mpon en t obt a in ed thr o ugh frequency anal yses . When
measure men ts are men using a freq uency analyzer . narr ow band ana lyses shall be carried OUt. in
wh ich the measuring period of processed d ata shal l be lim ited to 2 to 4 second s for the entire
measurin g pe riod (ap proxi mately One min ute).

4. Standard fo r Eval ua ti ng Vibratiou

The e val ua tion standard nomogram for hull vibration shall be as shown in Fig ure .
If the re are vertical , longitud inal and transverse vibration exisring conc urrentl y de pending on the ship ' s
co nd ition w hen vibra tion measure rneru s are taken . the nomogra m in Figure shal l be applied ind ividu ally for
ev aluatio n lO respectiv e vibration components in each dtree tion .

-74 ­ - 75 ­
 JIS

F 1010-1 9 84
F090H990
Yacht's Hom Cleats

I. Sc ope

Thi s Japan ese Indu strial Sta ndar d specifies aluminium alloy ho rn cleats (he rem after referred t o as "c leat" )
used for moori ng ope rat io n o f small craft such as pleasure boa ts .

2. Con stru ction , Shape and Dimen sions

The co nst ruc tio n, shape an d dim ension s o f th e cleat s shall be as shown in Figure and T able I .

3. Material s
The ma terials of th e cleats sha ll be as given in Tabl e 2_

4. Surfa ce Tr eatment

Anodi c ox idat ion coatin g o f JlS H 860 1 quah ty 0-9' KI Or S-14-K2 Or upward shall. as a rule, be appli ed
On th e cleat s.

5. Visual Inspection

Visual inspec tion shall be carried out on th e clea ts, and then the cleats shall be free fro m such defects as
cracks and de trim enta l Flaws,

6. Designation

Th e cleat s sha ll be designated by th e titl e and nomin al size. liS num ber may be used in pJace of th e titl e.

Example : Alumm ium Alloy Yacht', Horn Cleat 80 or J t.SF IOlO-80

10
Frequency (Hz)

Figure Evaluation sta ndard nomo gram for hull vibration (peak \'a.h)e)
Reference Standards:

lIS G 4315 - Stainless Steel Wires for CoJd Head ing an d Cold For ging
lIS H 520 2 ­ Aluminium Alloy Castings
lIS H 8601 - Ano dic Oxi dat ion Coa tings on Aluminium and Alumini um Alloys

- 77 ­
-76 ­
 JI S

" 101 0·1 9 84 F 1011· 1984

L Ya cht's Fairleads

I. Scope
This J ap anese Indu srrial Sl ~n d ard specifies alumin ium alloy fairleads (hereinafte r referred 10 as " fairlead" )
used for moo ring operati on of small craft such as p leasure boat s.
o <Inn. ~J countersinking

2. Constracti on, Shape and Dimensions

The construct ion , shape and dime nsion s o f the fairleads shall be as shown In figure and Table 1.

:i :r.: 3. Materi als

i, Th e maten als o f t he fairlead s shall be as given in Table 2.

4. Surface T rea tment

L. Anodic OX idation coaling of JI S H 860 1 q ualit y 0·9· KI or S-14 'K 2 o r upward shall, as a rule, be applied
on the fairleads.

S. Visual Inspection
Visual inspec tion shall be carried ou t on the Iairleads, and rhen the Iairleads shall be free from such defect s
Remark: Figure is shown as an exa mple . as cracks and d etrirnen tal flaws.

Figure
6. Designation
The fairleads ' hall be designated by the tit le and nominal srze. liS number may be used in place of the title.
Tab le I Principal dimensi ons of Yacht' s Horn Cleat
Uui t r mrn Alumuu urn Alloy Yach t' s Fa irlead 10 or Jl S F I OII ~ l O

Body Fixingscrew hole Reference

No m mal I
Reference Du . of appli cabl e
see L
L, B I H I H, H, T Rr,
- -
Rr. 1 Rr, - ­
~- ~
No . D D, I Vmy iou rope

I (max .)

80 80 1 28 1 12 IS I 13 6.S 3.S 4 3.5 6 M 4 2 4.5 9 20 6

, -­
100 100 2S 15 20 18 ; 9 4 6 5 7.5 M 4 2 4.5 I 9 20 8

120 120 35 19 24 21 11 5 7 6 9.5 M 5 2 5.5

II I 25 10

140 140 47 21 30 27 16 6 8 7.5 10.5 M 6 2 6 .5 13 35 12

:
170 170 51 26 35 30 18 7 9 9 \3 M 8 2 8.5 17 45 14

200 200 30 28 4{) 35 20 7 10 10 14 M 8 I 2 8.5 17 60 16

Z60 2W 1< 14 1 30 I 4-5 40

I
23 8 12 12 15 M 10 2 II 21 30 18

Table 2 Material '

Reference Standards:
No. Component Materi31
JIS G 43 15 ­ Stainless Steel Wires for Cold Head ing and Cold Forging
I !kl<I y J IS H 52 02 - AC 7 A ­ F JIS H 5202 - Alum inium Alloy Casu ngs
2 Countersunk head machine screw Jl S G 4315 - SUS 304 - WSA Jl S H 8 601 - Anod ic Oxida t io n Coat ings on Alumin ium and Aluminium Alloys

-n- - 79 ­
 lIS
F JOIJ-l 984 F 1012-1984

Yacht 's Cr oss Bitt s

f
I 1. Scop e
t
\ Thi s J apan ese Industrial St and ard specifie s stain less stee l pipe cros s bius (h ereinafter referred to as "c ross
\ bitt") used fo r mooring o peratio n o f sm all craft such as pleasu re boat s.

-.
.1 2. Co nstru ctio n. Sh ape an d Dimensions
Thc constructio n, shape and dimensions of th e cro ss bitts shall be as show n in Figure and Ta ble 1.

L,
3. Mat erials
Th e ma terials o f the c rOSS blllS shall b e as given in Table 2.
L

4 . Visual Inspecti o n
Visual ins pection shall be carr ied o ut on t he cross bins, and the n the CroSS bitts shall be frce from de tri­
m ental defects and be welded sound ly with th e least strain as far as practicable on the ex ternal app earan ce.

5 . Designation
The Cross bitt s shall be designated by the til le and nomi nal size. JI S nu m ber may be used in place of the
titl e.

Exampl e: Stainle .. Steel Pipe Yacht ', CrossBIle 125 0' J IS F I Ot 2-t 25

~)

Remarks ; 1. Figure i s shown 'ISan ex am ple.

2. Surfaces In co n tact wlth the rope in usc j haU be finished smoo thly

F igure

T able I Prin cipal d imensions of Yacht's F airlead

Unit: rum

Bcd y t~ IXU'l ~ ".,,

'Tc....hole Rcferen.::c
Nominal
Reference -....._ .. Dia of 3Pplicable

-­ --
sue L Hole
No. I V ln y lOtl rOpe
dl2 .
L. L, B H h, 10. ;" R" R" H,. T r (ma x.. )

10 12 120 50 32 27 6 21 JS is 7.S 21 6 J4 MS 3 SS 100 10

I. t. I .. 52 36 3S a -?7 19 20 ~ .S 27 e 20 M6 3 6.5 120 l-l

.­ j

is 18 182 60 43 so 12 38 26 23 13 38 12 27 M8 3 8. ~
i tSO I Ie

22 22 202 64 50 66 t' 42 28 27 16 46 14 33 Ma 3 RS 1. 170 22

26 26 232 93 6S 73 20 53 3:') 4l) li .S 53 18 ~{ 5 Me 3 ii .; 200 26

Tab le 2 Materials

Reference St and ards :

No. Co mpo nen t I Mat erial
Body I l1S H 5101 - AC i A ­ F ns G 3459 - Stainless Steel Pipe s
JlS G 4 31 5 - Stainless Steel Wires for Co ld Heading and Cold Fo rging
Countersu nk head machm e screw I JI S G 4315 - SlJ S 304 - WSA

- 80 ­ - 81 ­
 JIS
F 1012 · 19 84 F 10 13-198 7

B Yacht's Rigging Screws

"'D,
Scope
TIlls J apanese Industrial Standard specifies stainless steel riggiog screws (hereina fter referred to as "rigging

0J .ls: . ' If 10''') installed on small craft such as pleasure boats.

Constru ction, Shape and Dimensi ons
l" I c:;
The construction, shape and dimensions shall be as shown in Figs. 1 to 6.
"­
I. Materials
:J:: - - - t­
,, The materials shall be as shown in Fig. 1.
I
I '1. Visual Inspectio n
I !,
I
The rigging SCre w shall be visually inspected and shall have smooth surface being free from such det rimental
.lefects as cracks and flaws.

S. Designation
- The rigging screw shall be designated by the title and nominal size (maximum diamet er of app licable wire
rop e). JIS number may be used in place of th e title.
~I a,
Examp le: Yach t's Rigging Screw 3 or 1lS F 1013·3

Figure

Tabl e 1 Prin cipal dimensions of Yachr 's Cross Bitt

m : mrn

No mma l

, ~,
H h
B iD
I D,
-
g erereece

D,
.--­
D,
t: , I, , ~ f, J h f, f, f,
f"i:ungboll 'hole

Nom,," 1
s:u:eo f
Roc:: l'aCDce

Dta . of .a.ppuCili ble

J I V~yl o ll rop e
boll (ma ....)
12.1 125 T; 110
I J< 217 40 zs 00 J 2.5 , • ~
, J 3 3 'I 8 8.5 60 10
150 150 85 ' 40 427 27.2 50 J4 100 as 2.5 J • • I 3 , , " 8
8.5 7.
200 20V Us
I"'" 6O.S 4~U '0 ;0 '40 l.9 3.• 4 '0 s 3.S 4 s , M 10 II 110
"
1.
2\0 25. ' 40 240 76,3 60.; 86 10
'''' S..2 ,. 4 12 5 , , e • M 12 13 ISO 20
:lOO soo 165 280 ..., i 6.3
"" 86 200 5.' S., S 5 I ,.
" 4
" MI.

I. "
5 '.5 ' 60
" Reference Standards:
sso 3SO 205 310 114.3­ 89. 1 ,2> ' 00 i 260 • s.s • 15
• 5 s 75 7.5 'I 220 28
JIS B 0207 - Metric Fine Screw Threads
JIS B 1181 - Hexagon Nuts
Table 2 Materials
ns G 3459 ­ Stainless Steel Pipes
JI S G 43 03 ­ Stainless Steel Bars
No . Compo nen t Ma terial JIS G 4305 - Cold Rolled Stainless Steel Sheet and Plate
1 Bod y JlS G 3 45 9 ­ SUS 304 TP lIS G 43 15 ­ Stainless Steel Wires for Cold Heading and Cold Forging
2 Fixin g boll 1IS G 43 15 - SUS 30 4 - WSA

- 82 ­ - 83 -
F 1013-1987 F J0 13·19WI

4 Left-hand thread d Right-band thread d

/ I _\
H-'-­ ~
Q
0&­
I
I
- \
\
1
~T
~ l I
( I I'
L

L J
Unit:mm
Nom inal Nominal size D,
size of thread d D I L I d,
3 M 6 XO. 75 II 9 2 00 to 6
4 M 8 xO . 75 12 . 7 10. 5 2 100 12 6
5 M IOXI 16 )3 . 3 2 .5 120 15 8
No. Compooent Material
6 M 12 xI. S 19 16 3 135 18 8
1 Body ns G 34.59 SUS 304TP Or SUS Jl6TP
7 M 14 XI. S 25 18 3 140 20 8 .5
~ Eye bolt (left -hand thread)
l IS G 43 15 SUS 304-WSA or ns G 4303 SUS 316 8 M IOX I. S 27 .2 21.5 .~ .8 165 24 8 .5
3 Eye bolt (tight -hand thread )
4 Toggle ns G 4305 SUS 304 Or .TISG 4303 SUS 316 Remark : Screw thread d shall conform to 1IS B 0207.

5 Toggle pin
6 Connecrlng pin
Fig.2 Body

7 Hexagon nut (right-hand thread) ns G 43 15 SUS 304·WSA or l IS G 4303 SUS 3 16

8 Hexagon nu t (left -hand thread)
9 Split pin

Fig. I Yacht' s Rigging Screw

- 84 - - 85 ­
F 1013-1987
F 1013-1987

d n ei t-h and 0 1 right-hand lhread)

.:::I--..L-..:...-----;--'----~--t__,

t,

( L ,)

Unit: nun
Refe t­
Unit: mm
No~i na1 Nomin al size
aree of thread d H ~ I, 4 4 d, R T
NOminal siz­e
or Nominal
siz e t, E B, B, do, L, ~ I, r r, r,
(L,) hexagon nu t
3 2.5 6 15 5 .4 6 .2 32 .5 19 12 3 7.5 2.7
3 M 6 XO. 75 12 58. 5 4() 12 6 .5 6 .2 6 5 M 6
4 M 8XO .75 15 70.5 50 12 8 8.5 7.5 6 .5 M 8
4 3 8 19 6 .8 8 .5 39 22 IS 4
I 9 .5 3 .4

5 3 .2 10 24 8 .8 10. 5 48 .2 27 18. 2 5 12 4.4

5 M IOX I 18 87 . 5 63 14. 5 10 10 5 9 8 .5 MIO
6 4 12 28 10 .4 12 . 5 55 30 22 6 14 5.2
6 M 12 Xl. 5 22 103 73 18 12 12 . 5 Il 10 M 12
7 5 14 33 12 14. 5 72 .5 34 22 7 16 . 5 6
7 M 14 XI. 5 24 115 80 22 13 l4. 5 12 II M 14
8 5 16 40 14. 5 16 .5 77. 5 43 29.5 8 20 7. 3
8 ~I 16 X 1. 5 30 129 89 24 16 16 . 5. 15 14 M 16
Rerum: Hexagon nub shall confo rm to JIS B IIB I Anne. Type 3 and SCrew thread , shall co nform to IlS B 0207.

Fig. 4 Toggle
Fig. 3 Eye Bolt

- 86 ­ - 87 ­
 lIS

F 1013·1987
F 1014-1987

Yacht 's Shackles

1. Scope
This Japanese Industrial Standard specifies stainless steel shackles (hereinaft er referred to as "shackl e" )
used for wire ropes, Manila ropes and synthe tic fibre ropes onboard small craft such as pleasure boats .
Remll:1k: In this stan dard unlts and numerical values in ( J are in accordance with the ee e veneeaei system of
Unit : mm uniu and given fer referen ce o nly .

No mioaJ No m inal s ize

size D, D, d, ~ 4 4 c or ,pHt p in 2. Classification
3 8 6 2 16 3 I. S 0. 2 2X I0 The shackles shall be classified into three t ypes according to the shape of body as given in Table 1.
4 II 8 2 19 3 I. 5 0.2 2X I2

5 t3 10 3 23 4 2 0.5 3X 15 Table I

6 16 12 3 26 4 2 0.5 3 XI 8
Type Shape or body Ran<:' of nominal size
7 18 14 4 31 4 3 0 .8 4x20
1
A Pla te 4 to 8
8 20 16 4 34 5 3 .5 0 .8 4 x 22
B Rectangular with round corner 4 to 9
C Circular 9 to 25
Fig.5 Toggle Pin

3. Con,rouetion, Shape and Dimensions

The constru ction , shape and dimensions of th e body and pin of tbe shackle shall be as shown in Figs. 1 to 3.
The body of Type A shall be finished smooth at the com ers .

4. Mnleri:Us
The materials shall be as given in Ta ble 2.

t. Table 2
Unit: rom
N om inal c Type M3te:ria.l9
sjze D, D, D. h 4 I, C, Compo nen t

3 8 6 5.4 I
2 -4 16 1.5 0 .2 0. 1 A lIS G 4305 SUS 3114 or SUS 316

4 II 8 7. 2 3 21 1. 5 0 .2 0.1 Bod y B lIS G 4305 SUS 304

5 13 10 8 .8 4 26 2 0 .5 0 .2 C 1lS G 4304 SUS 3114 or SUS 316

Pin A, B. C lIS G 4303 SUS 304 or SUS 316
6 16 12 10.4 5 31 2 0 .5 0 .3
7 18 14 II 5 8 38 3 0 .8 0 .3
8 20 16 14 8 43 3.5 0 .8 0 .3

Fig. 6 Conn ecting Pin

Re ference Standard s:
jlS B 0205 - Metric Coarse Screw Threads
IIS G 4303 - Stainless Steel Bars
JlS G 4304 - Hot Rolled Stainless Steel Sheet and Plate
IIS G 430 5 - Cold Rolled Stainless Steel Sheet and Plate

- 88 - - 89­
 F 1014-1987
F 1014-1987

A Body A Pin
5. Tests and Inspec tion
Th e shackle shall be subjected to the following tests :
(1) Load Test The load test of the shackle shall be carried out by applying a load weighing twice th e
working load given in Table 3 and th ere shall be no defeet .

~ -t
Table 3 WorltiDg Load of Shackle
Unit : l:N [k17] -.J

~
Nominal size
A B C
,
4
5
6
0.65 [ 661
1.00 [1021
1.60 [163)
-
-
-
"" 'To d
8 2.80 [286] - E
-!' I· Unit : mm
9 - 3.72 [379] 4.13 I 421)
10 - - 5.10 [ 520] Nomin al
",e
No minal sue
of thread d
a b c B D d, L d, Ii, f I s I, D, I

12 - - 7.H [ 749 ) 4 M4 5.5 1 0.5 10 10 4 .5 18 4 2 .5 3.5 15 2 .5 2 6 2

16 - - 12.7 [1 293)
5 ~1 5 6 1.5 0 .5 13 Il 5.5 24 5 4 3. 5 19 3 2 B 2 .5

19 - - 18.9 [1927]
6 M6 7 1. 5 0.5 14 14 6. 5 27 6 4 5 21 3.5 2 .5 9 3
22 - - 24.7 [2519)
B ~1 8 9 1. 5 0 .5 18 19 8 .5 32 8 5 5 25 '3 5 3 12 3
2S - - 32.5 (3314)
Remark: The screw thread d shall confonn 10 ns B 0205.

~!g. I Yach t's Shackle A

(2) Visual Inspection The shackle shall be visually inspected . The surface shall be smooth and free

from det rimental crack s and flaws.

B Body BPin
a
6. Designation
The shackles shall he designated by the title . type and nominal size (nominal size of screw thre ads of
shackle pin). ns numb er may be used in place of the t it le.
Examp le; Yacht', Shackle A 0 ' JIS F 1014·A4

....I

I
"""
r' B
d

Unit : mm

Nom inal Nom inal size a b B D d, L d, D, d, f I s I, t

aiac of thr e ad d
4 2. 5 10 10 4.5 18 4 6 2 .5 3 .5 15 2 .5 2 2
4 M4
5 3 ..) 12 12 5. 5 22 5 8 4 3 .5 18 3 2 2.5
5 M5
'6 4.5 14 13 6 .5 26 6 9 5 5 21 3. 5 2.5 3
6 M6
7 6 18 17 8 .5 33 8 12 5 5 26 4 .5 I 3 4
8 MB
8 7 20 18 9 .5 37 9 14 6 6 31 5 .5 4 5
9 M9
Remark: The screw thread d shall conform 10 ns B 0205.
Fig.2 Yacht's Shackle B

- 90 ­ -91 ­
 JI S

F 1014 ·198 7 F 1015-1987

C Body C Pin Yacht's V·Type Bow Eyes

I. Scope
This Japanese Industrial Standard specifi es stainless stee l D-rype bow eyes (he reinaft er refe rred to as " bo w
-v es") used for hoisting small craft such as pleasure boats .
d
}. Shape and Dimensions
The shape and dtme nsions shall be as shown in FigUre.

The relationship betw een the nominal size and length of bol t (L) are given in Table.

Materials
The materials shall be as shown in Figure .

•\. Visual Inspection

The bow eye sh all be visually inspeeted . Th e surface shall be smooth and free fro m d efective cracks and
Haws.
Unit: m.rn
S. Designation
N ominal N ominal siz e
size of thread d B d, L I D d. d, d, D, I I S I,
The bow eye shall be designated by the title, nominal size (nominal size of screw thread s on body ) and
9 M 8 18 9.5 35 9 18 9 9 5 14 36 4 9 3 .5 length o f bolt (L) . JIS numb er may be used in place of the t itle.
10 M 10 20 il 43 10 22 10 10 6 1S 40 S 10 4
Example: Yacht ' U·Type Bow Eye 8 X 2.'i or ns F 1015 8-25
12 M 12 24 13
I SO 12 26 12 12 7
I 16 48 S 12 5

16­ M1 6 33 17 64 16 34 16 16 -· <-8 22 65 8 16 6
f-­
19 M 18 37 20 72 19 40 19 19 9 26 75 9 19 8

22 M 22 44 24 90 22 44 22 22 12 31 88 12 22 11

2S M 24 49 27 93 2S 48 2S 25 12 34 99 13 25 14

Remark: Th e ' Clew thread d 5haOconfo rm to ns B 0205 .

Fig. 3 Yacht 's Shackle C

Reference Standard s:
JIS B 0205 - Metri c Coarse Serew Threads
JlS B 118 1 - Hexago n Nnts
ns G 4305 - Cold Rolled Stainless St eel Sheet and Plate
JlS G 431 5 - Stainless St eel Wires fo r Cold Heading and Cold For ging

- 92 - - 93 ­
F 1015 -1987 F 1015 -1987

Table Relationship betwe en Nominal Size and Bolt Length (L)

om in al
!ize 10 12 16
Leng1h(L)

25

30

35

40

45

50

60

70

8tJ

90

100

110

120

B 130

140

Unit ; mm 150

I He;:fon
I~
Il-bclt St epper Washer
Nornim l
sit !!'
B d D
I H B I I I i
C D, r I d, d,
"
I N'0l!lina t
size
Remark: c=J shows the :a.ppl.ic:able zone and ~ shows the prohibited zone.

8 32 M 8 8 Z7 12 32 16 8. 5 8 1.5 L8 9 1./; I M 8
-- - -

*1 -
10 40 M 10 10 30 15 40 20 10. 5 LO 2 22 11 2 MIO

2:31 ~2:3~
12 50 M 12 12 38 L9 50 24 13 12 2. 3 26 13.5 2. 3 M 12
16 60 M 16 16 44 22 30 32 17
~ 32

No. Comp onent Material

1 U-bolt lIS G 4315 SUS 304-WSA

2 Stepp er rts G 4305 SUS 304
3 W3>he, rts G 4305 SUS 30 4
4 Hexagon nut 1IS G4 315 SUS 304-WSA

Remark: The screw thread, OD U·bol t shall co nform to ns B 0205

and the hexagon D U! to lIS B 1181 Ann ex Typ e l.

Figure Yacht's U-type Bow Eye

- 94 - - 95­
 118

F 10 16·1989 F 1016- 1989

F 1016·1989

Yacht 's Thimbles

1. Sco pe ~l

T his Japanese Indu strial Standard specifies stainless steel thimb les (he rei nafte r referred 10 as "t himbles")
used in small craft such as pleasure boats.

2. Co nstruction, Sha pe a nd Dim ensions

The constructio n, shape and dim ensio ns of the thimb les shall be as show n in Figu r e.

3. Mat er ials
The ma terials of the thimbl es sha ll be of )IS G 4305- SUS 304 .

4. Vis ua l In spec tion

T he thimbles s hall be vis ually ins pected . The surface shal l be smooth and-free from de triment al cracks
and flaws.

5. Design ation
The thi mble sh all be designated by the title, or JIS numb er, nom inal size (nominal size of the maxim um Unil : mm
applica ble rope dia .), Nominal L,
size B B, D D, L r r, I

Exa m ple: Yacht', Th imble 2.5 or JlS r IOt6·2.5 2.5 4

2 .5
12
9
21
17
1. 5
0 .5
0 .8

3
4 .9
3
14
10
26
19
2
0 .5
I

4
6.2 4
18
12
33
24
2.5 0 .5
1. 2

5
7 .8 5
21
15
39
29
3
0.5 1.5

6
8 .8
6
26
18
47
36
3 .5 1
1.5

8
Jl 8
28
20
53
40
4.5 1
2

10
14 .2 10
38
25
il 49
5 .5 1
2 .5

12
17 .2 12. 5
42
28
is 55
6. 5
t 2 .5

Figure Thim bles

Refer ence Sta ndar d:

JI S G 4305- Co ld Rolled Stainless Steel Plates and Sheets

- 96 ­ - 97 ­
 JIS

F 10) 7·1989 F 1017·1 98 9 F 1017-1989

Yacht's Ring Plates

1. Scope
This Japanese Industrial Sta ndard specifi es stainless steel ring plates (hereinafter referred to as "ring
plate") used in small craft such as pleasure boats,

2. Cons tr uet ion, Shape, Dimensions and Materials

The construction. shape. dimensions and materials of ring plates shalllJ<: as shown in Figure.

3. Visual Inspec tion

The ring plates shall be visually inspec ted. The surface shall be smooth and free from detrimental defects
such as cracks and flaws, and be welded so undly with the least strain as far as practicable.

4. Designation
The ring plate shall be designated by the tlile Or JIS number aiKl nominal size.
&.ampl e : Yeclu 's ring plate 6 or JIS F 1017·6

Unit: mm
Weldin8 leg Countersunk head
R11I8 Eye length
Nomina l machine screw
!,~ e Nominal Drilling Counter-
d D .4. a B b d, H I R r /, /, size ho lc dia . sunk dia .
6 6 3Q 40 28 32 20 5 9 3 5 4 2 ) M4 4 .5 9
8 8 40 47 33 38 24 6 12 4 6 5 2 2 M5 5.5 )I

10 10 50 56 42 4S 31 8 J4 4 8 5 2 2 MS 5.5 Jl

12 12 60 66 50 53 37 10 17 5 10 6 3 2 M6 6.5 13

No. Compo nent Mat erial

1 Rin8
118G 4303-SUS 304
2 Eye

3 1'J.d 1lS G 43OS-SUS 304

Figure Yaeht's ring plate

Refer ence Standards:

JI S G 4303- Stainless Steel Bars

JIS G 4305- Cold Rolled Stainless Steel Plates and Sheet s

- 98 ­ -99 ­
 JIS

F 10 18·1989 F 1018-1989 F 1018 ·1989

Yacht 's Eye Plates Countersunk head mach ine .screw ho le

1. Scope
This Japanese Industria l Stand ard specifies stainless s tee l eye plates (hereinaf ter referr ed to as "eye
plate") used in small cra ft such as pleasure boats.
o
2. Cons tru ction, Sha pe, Dimensions an d Mate ri als
The construct ion, shape. dimen sions and materials o f eye piales shal l be as shown in Figu re .

3. Visual Insp ection

The eye plates shall be vis ually inspected. The surface shall be smoo th and free from de trimental defects
a
such as crac ks and flaws, and be welded sound ly with the least s train as far as praeticable.
A
4. Designation
The eye plate shall be designated by the title or Jrs number and nominal size.

Exampl e: Yacht' s eye plate 5 or jtS F 1018· 5

Unit: mm

Welding Countersunk head

Ey e Pad machine screw
leg lengt h
Nominal
size
d H R A 0 B b

20 I
I
t r f, f, Nominal Drilling Counter'
size hale d ia. sunk dia.
4.5 9
5 5 7 3 4() 28 32 3 4 2 I M4

6 6 9 10 47 33 38 24 3 5 2 I M5 5 .5 II

8 8 11 12 56 <12 45 31 I 4 5 2 2 M5 5 .5 II

)0 10 15 14 66 SO 53 37 I 4 6 3 2 M6 6 .5 13

No. Component Malena)

I Eye JlS G 4303-SUS 30 4

2 Pad JlS G 4305-SUS 304

Figure Yacht's eye plate

Referenc e Stand ard s:

JIS G 4303- Stainless Steel Bars
J IS G 4305- Cold Rolled Stainless Steel Plares and Sheets

- 100 - - 10 1 ­
 .ns lIS
F 101~ 1 991 F 1019-1991 F 1020-1992

Yacht's air vents Small craft - Anchor chain s

I. Scop e Thi s Japan ese Industrial Standard speci fies m e air vents used for veming air from the fuel oil 1. Scope Th is Japanese Industrial Standard specifies type, shape , dime nsions, and mechani cal properties .of
tank s of motor boats, yachts, e tc, aneh or chain s used for the windlasses of small craft (herein after refe rred to as "c hain") and hot galvanlz­
ings,
2. Construetion an d s hape The cons truction and shape of the air vents shal l be as show n in Refe re nce Remarks: 1. Thi s Standard applies to chains with a nominal diameter range between 6 and 12.5 nun
Fig . 1. used for mooring small craft. which can be controlled by a windl ass. but does not apply
to those for slings.
3. Dimenslons an d ou tlet area Th e dimens ion s of the air vents shall be as given in Table 1. The outlet 2. Thi s Standard makes-re feren ce to ihe following standards:
area shall not be less than 1/4 ltd'. lIS H 8641 - Zi nc hot dip galvanizi ngs
ISO 1835 - Short link chain for lifting purposes - Grade M (4), non-calibrated . for
4. Materials The material of the air vents shall be brass, weather-resi sting and oil-resi sting plasuc s, or chain slings etc.
equivale nt, [SO 4565 Small cr aft - Anchor chains
Reference: Thi s Standard has been established paying d ue regard to the preferred coordi nation
5. Appearance inspection Cracks, Raws or o ther defects detrimental to use shall not be found in appear­
with ISO 4565.
ance inspection .

2. C lass ification Chain s shall be classified as given in Ta ble 1 accordin g to the .nomin al dia. and grade.
6. Des ignation The air vent shall be designated by the Litle or lIS number and nominal dia,
Examp le: Yatctu's Air VeU11 6 or JlS F 1019-16
Ta ble 1. Classification of chains
7. Marking The following particul ars sh all be marked at a suita ble locaiion on the air vents:
Nominal dia, Class symbol
(1) Nomin al dia.
lIlIll Oa "L Class M
(2) Man ufaetu rer 's name or abbreviation for \1
6 L- 6 M- 6
Table 1 D imens ions Unit: rnrn 6.3 L- 6.3 M-6.3
8 L- 8 M- 8
Reference
Nominal dia, D D, d M 10 L- IO M-IO
!J Iz
12 L-12 ~t - 12
16 17 20 14 M20 20 25
12.5 L- 12.5 M-1 2.5
19 20 22 17 M22 25 30
Remarks : 1. The minimum breaking stress for Class L chains shill
be 3 15 MPa, an<l !hal for CIass M chains, 400 MPa.
2. Nominal diameters of 6 mm an<l 12 mm have been pro­
Outlet
visionally establis hed on the basi, of !he provisions of
Gauze ISO 1835.

3. Shapes a nd di mens ions

(1) The shapes and dime nsions of chains shall be as s hown in F ig. 1 and Table 2.
(2) When an end link is fined to the chain . it shall be designated as e nd hnk ,:. .
(3) The allowable dimen sional devi ations for chains and end link A are applicable to galvanized one s.

R efer ence Fig. 1 Co nstruction and sha pe of air vent

- 102 - - 103 ­
F 1020·1992 F 10U)-l992

4. M ech an ical p roperties Th e mechan ic aLp roper ties of chains sha ll be as given in Table 4.
End link A.
Table 4. Mechani cal pr op erties of chains
IJn i t ~ kN

Breaking load Total

Nominal Proof Ie" load elongation after
dia. Class L Class M Class L Class M fracture %

6 9 1l .4 1&or more 22.8 or more 20 or more

6.3 10 12.5 20 or more 25 or more

8 16 20.2 32 or more 40.4 or more

to 25 31.5 50 or more 63 or more

12 35.5 45.3 71 or more 90.6 or more

L=I7p, P,
12.5 40 50 &0or more 100 or more

Fig. 1 Sh a pes of chai ns

5. In spection The inspection sha ll be carried OUI on the following items (1) through (5) :
(1) Dimen sion al ins pec ti on The di men sional inspecti on shall be carri ed o ut in accordan ce wi th the stan­
T able 2. Dimen sions a nd all owable dimen sional d eviations dards in Ta ble 2 after hal- dip ga lvanizing.
U DJ' t : nun (2) Visual inspec t ion Burrs at we lds shall be rem oved to make a smooth surface. and chai ns shall be free of
EodIinkA hair-line cracks , ordinary cr acks and other detrimental flaws .
Nominal di.. Cbain elia, Pitch Inside-..idth Outside width I I Linkslength (3) Breaking in sp ection Chains shall withstand breaking load of no t le ss than those gi ven in T a ble 4.
0Jaineli a, Pilch Inside width
Th e length of a lot from which le st chai ns are taken shal l be nor more than 200 rn, and the lengths of tes t
d. r, WI W L d,. p, W,
chains shall be not less than 7 links .
6 6 ± 0.3 18 ± 0.5 8.1 or more 21.5 or less 198:t 4 8 ± 0.4 40 ± 1 2 18or more (4) Proof stre ngt h inspec tio n T he p roof strength in sp ec tion shal l be in accord ance with the fo llowing
6.3 6.3 ±0.3 19 ± 0.5 8.5,or more 22.7 or tess 2Q8+ 4 8 ± 0.4 40± 1.2 18 or more requ irem ents:
8 8 ±0.4 24 ± 0.7 10.8 or more 2$.8 or Less 264 ±5 10 ± 0.5 44 ±1.3 20 or more (a) The proof stre ngth inspection for chains shal l be carried out for each leng th of chai ns thar have passed
the break ing in spection. Wh en the proof te st loads specified in Ta b le 4 are applied according LO the
10 10 ± 0.5 30± .0.9 13.5 or more 36 Or less 330 ± 7 12 ± 0.6 54 ± 1.6 25 or more
class of chai ns, no hair -line cra cks , ordi nary cr acks, partin g or other abnormalities shall be ca used .
12 12 ± 0.6 36 ± l.l 16.2 or more 43.2 or less 396 ±8 14 ±0,7 54 ± 1.6 25 or more (b) If the inspection in (a) fails, the chains may be rete sted once , with the failed lin k replaced wi th new test
12.5 12.5 ± 0.6 38 ± l.l 16.9 or more 45 or less 413 ±& 14±0,7 54± 1.6 25 or more chains. If. however, not less than 5% of all links of chains fai l, no re tests shall be accepted .
(5) T ota l elonga tio n ins pec tio n a fte r fr act ure The total elongation inspec tic n after fracture shal l be car -
Notes: (I) The allowable dimensional deviati on ror ihe welded part d.... shall be ::2 .J~
ried out on the chains that ha ve pas sed the proof strength inspe c tion. With rne ga uge len gt h se t a t 7 links of
(I> The dunensrcnal devianon of cb shall be such thai me c onnectio n with cham s IS satisfactory
chains , the total elongation after fractu re shal l be nor le ss th an 20 %.

(4) Th e len gths of chai ns shall be as give n in Table 3, and in addi tion , they s hal l c omply wi th the lengths spee­ 6. Hot -dip ga lva nizi ng - Hot-dip galvanizing shall be carried out as follows :
ified by eaeh Class ificati o n Society. (1) Hoi-dip gal vanizi ng shal l be carrie d out in acco rdance with JI S H 8641-HDZ50.
(2) Hot-dip galvanizing s hall be c arri ed Out af ter the proof stre ngth in spection .
Table 3. Le ngth of cba ins
Unitr m
7. Des ignatio n Chains shall be designated by the title , class (grade) and nominal dia. The JI S nu m ber may
Nominal dia, StandardLength be used in stead of the title ,
Example: Yachl', anchor chams L-6 orJ IS F 1020·L-6
5 10 30 50 80
6 0 - 0 0 - 8. Markin g The follow ing par ticular s shal l be marked indelibly on ine end lin ks of d"lit" or me ta l name­
6.3 0 - 0 0 - plates :
8 0 - 0 0 - (1) Class (Grade )
10 - 0 - 0 - (2) Proof test load
(3) Da le of manufact ure
12 - 0 - 0 0
(4) M anu fac turer 's name Or abb rev iatio n for it
12.5 - 0 - 0 0
9. T est certificates Manufac ture rs of chains s hal l. whe n requ e sted, fu rnish test and inspection certi fica tes
Remark; Columnsmarked wilh0 tn the table represent the recommended length JOreach nominalilia.
for each lot of chai ns supplied.

- 104 - - 105 ­
 JIS
FI02H992 F 1021-1 9 92 F 1021-1992

Yacht's life line 4. Materials Th e materi als o f Hfe lines sha ll be wires conforming 10 JIS G 4308 -SUS304 , SUS3 16 or
eq uivalent,

1. Scop e Thi s Jap anese Ind ustrial Standard specifies the stainless stee l life lines used for pre venting cre w The lining materials of life lines shall be soft polyvin yl resi n and polyami de resin. whic h are wea ther-resis­
mem bers of motorboats and yachts from falling ove rboard (he reinafter re ferre d to as "life line "). tant .

R emarks : This Standard makes re ference to the following standar ds :

J[S F 1022 - Y acht 's stanc hio ns

5, Mechanical prop erties Th e mech anica l pro perti es of life lines shall be as speci fied in JIS G 3540-4.
JIS G 3540 - Wire ropes for mechanical control
Th e bre aking loads of wires shall be as gi ven in T abl e 3 .
JIS G 430 8 - Stai nless stee l wire rods

Referen ce: Sranch ions according to [his Srandard shall be used in co mbination with yacht ' s sian­ Tab Ie 3 B reaking load s
Unit:k.N
chions specified in JIS F 1022 .
Nominal size Breaking load
2, Class ifica tio n Life li nes shall be class ified Into 2 kinds of a 19-w ires strands and a 7-w ires 6-mands 4 12.160or more
wi th o ne co mmo n core by the co mpos ition of the wir es in accor dance wi th JIS G 3540 .
5 J5.887 or more
3. Construction and dim ension s The const ruc tio n of life lines shall be as given in Table 1, e nsleeve d in 6 22.849 Ormore
linin g material s of a uniform thickn ess.
6. T est a n d In spection Life lines shall be Inspected in acco rdance with 10 . and 11, of JIS G 354 0. and the
Table 1 Construction relev ant req uire me nts shal l be satis fied .

The linin gs of life lines shal l be free from supe rficial flaw s an d b ubbles thal are de trim ental for servi ce.

Composition 19 wires strands 7 wires 6 strands with One common core

Symbo l I x 19 7x7 7 . Designat ion The life lines shall be designa ted by title . JIS num ber and sym bol.
Example: Yacht' s life line lX19 or JlS F I02I · IX19
Sectional
shape
8. Marking The life lines that have passed inspection shall be inde libly marke d on the life lin es or the lin­
ings with the title and nominal dia., or the JI S num ber and nomin al dia,

Ii
Exampl e: Yacht's life line 4 or JIS F 1021 4

•
The di men sions of life line s shall be as given in Table 2 .
Table 2 Dim en sions

Nominal size Rope di a. (d) rom Symbo l Outside dia. of lining (D ) mm

4 4 l x 19 7
5 5 7x 7 8
6 6 7X 7 9

- 106 - - 107 ­
 F 2014-198 7
F 2014 ·1987

5. Materi als A tta ched T able 1. Prin cipal Dimensions

Unit: m.m
The materi als shall be as given in Attached Ta bles 2,4,6 and 8.
Diame ter of moo rin g line (reference)
6. Inspection I, I,
Ty pe Wire rop e I Hem p t~m~
Th e fairl eads shall be subje cte d to th e following Hems of inspect ion . No .2 No .4 No .5 No . 6 1 rope fibre
6 x12 6x24 6x30 6x37 I ro pe
(I ) Appearance Inspection The fairle ad shall be subjected to visual inspect ion , an d shall satis fy th e
requir em ents of 4.(1). A1'wd AS

(2) Operational Inspection R ota ting parts shall be subje cte d to op era tional insp ect ion , and shall

sati sfy th e req uire men ts of 4.(2) .

7. Designa tion
350

Th e fairlead shall be designat ed by the ti tle, type an d nominal diame ter . JIS number may be used in place

400 320 37.5 40

of the t itle .
AS 450 360
Example : Fairlead AF 150 01 JIS F 2014 AF 150
3QO 20 16 18 16 32
BFwd BS
330 2S 20

BF

~
and
as

~
as

CF and CS
2.5
- -
CF - 28 2' 25 22. 4 65
- - -70- ­ ' 9
45
an d
- 35. S 30
--
31 5 28
CS
- 53-
- - 35. 5 37.5 33. S 75
- - --

OF and OS

£,

I L

Remark: Dimension s L, 1, 1. and 12 m3Y be modifi ed to SUit tile form of hull partwhere lhe fmlead LS to be tltted .

-168 ­ - 169 ­
P 201 4-1987 F 2014- 1987

Unil :mm At tached Table 2. Materials for Open Type, Cast Iron made

No . Component M.te:ri31

1 Rolla ns G 5501 ·FC 20

Remarks; I , Dimensions marked wi th " shall be de termined acco rd­
2 Base JIS G 3101-SS 41
ing 10 the hull dde lin e.
Th e construction, ,hape an d dimen sion.s of the base Cover Ste el plat e
3
are sho wn for reference onlv .
2. Hexagon bo lts shall confor~ to 115 B 1180 , and hexa­ 4 Bush JI5 H 5111 -BC6
gon nut, 10 Appendi x of JIS B 118 1-G",de 3.
5 Axle JIS G 405 1-S 25 C
3 . PIpe thr ead, ' holl confor m to ns B 020 2 or ns B
0203. Hexeg ou nut JIS G 40 51-5 25 C
6
4 . Th e COver shall be galvanized.
7 was her Steel plate

8 Set screw Brasswne

9 Pan head macblne screw Br.. .s bar

10 Boss Steel p late

11 Plug Brassbar

12 Se t scre w BI3 ~S wite

I I 13 Grease nipple BC3.3s

Remar k: ns G 405 I-S25 C shall be subjected to pr op erly beat treat ment,

.t5
Y
~~ · I '
OQ ,

-a
M . I
:z: d
:r

Fig.!. Open Type , Cast Steel made

- 170 ­ - 171 -
 ..
F 2014 ·1987
F 2014·1987
Unit; nun
Attac hed Table 3. Detailed Dimensions of Open Type, Cast Iron made
Uni t: rom
Remarks; 1. Dimens ions marked with * shall be de termm ed accord ­
Nomi- Roller ing to the hull Side line.
n:ll
dia. 0 0, 0, 0, 0, H 1:1, U, h, h, h, h. h, I , t
The corarrucrton, shape and dirn enslons of th e base
are show n fo r referen ce.o nly .
I
150 150 240 220 140 90 150 20 3 16 35 ! 45 35 39 30 zs 45 2. Hexagon boll. shall conform to 1IS B 1180 ,3110hexa­
24 45 48 gon nuts to Appendi x of 1IS 111181.{Juoe 3.
200 200 310 280 190 130 185 3 21 55 40 35 25 55
3. Pipe thr ead , shall conform to 1IS B 0202 or ns B
250 250 380 I 340 250 170 220 29 4 zs 55 65 50 52 40 30 65 0203.
440 400 210 240 30 4 30 62 70 55 53 45 30 75 4 . The rover shall be galvanized.
300 300 300
5. Item No. 15 ,hall be fitted in six place, Cor each
350 350 500 455 350 250 260 33 4 35 68 75 60 55 50 35 85 upper and lower part .
-
400 400 560 520 410 290 280 36 5 40 75 80 65 56 55 40 95

No rm- RoUer Base (ref ere nce) BU>h

na l

dia.
r r r w, w, b h
" s, r, a, O. I D. D, h, h.
150 20 17 13 9 7 190 75 12 8 40 71 95 71 56 . 35 35
200 25 21 20 10 8 230 85 · 14 10 40 95 120 91 71 45 40
250 28 25 2j 10 8 265 100 14 10 40 107 145 107 82 55 50
300 32 28 28 12 10 320 100 16 14 60 127 165 127 97 62 55
350 36 30 30 13 10 350 100 18 14 60 144 186 147 112 68 60
400 40 32 32 H 12 380 100 20 16 60 161 208 163 128 75 65

Bu,h Cover Washer AXle and hexagon nut

Pan head
Nomlnaf ma chin e screw
dia, r, I, H, I, r Nominal d
'. d, s, s, d. d, I­ L,
size of No .
thread ,
150 7 7 25 3.2 JlO M6 6 80 7 60 90 70 55 M 39 206 40
200 8 8 26 3.2 185 M6 6 95 8 80 115 90 70 M 52 254 49
250 9 9 33 4.5 254 M6 6 110 8 90 140 105 80 M 56 301 58
300 10 95 35 4 ..5 338 M6 8 120 9 110 160 125 95 ~164 331 61
350 11 10 37 4.5 435 M6 8 135 10 125 180 145 110 M 68 359 65
400 11 10.5 39 4.5 510 M6 10 150 10 140 200 160 125 M 76 391 67

Ax le and hexago n nut Ser screw fo r bush Set screw fo r nut

No rut­ R eference
nal Nominal No minal Calculate d
dia. L, L, L. L, 1-, L, L. L. r size o f Length No. size of Length No . )TL1SS (kg)
threads thr ead s
150 19 37 41 39 30 17 14 23 5 M6 12 4 M6 12 t 32. 1
200 24 47 51 44 39 19 15 31 7 M6 12 4 M6 12 I 64 .6
2jO 29 57 58 57 42 21 19 34 8 M8 20 4 M8 20 1 108
300 34 64 63 62 47 23 20 38 8 M8 20 4 M8 20 1 159
350 39 70 67 68 50 zs 22 40 9 M8 20 4 M8 20 t 235
400 45 78 70 75 56 28 25 46 10 M8 20 4 M8 20 1 336

Remark : The caleulat ed mass is. for on e rolle r ex cluding base.

Fig. 2. Open Type , Steel Plate made

- 173­
-172 ­
F 20 14·1987
F 2014-198 7
Attached Table 4. Open Type , Steel Plate made
Attac hed Table S. Detailed Dimensions of Open Type, Steel Plate made
No . Component Material
Unitemm
1 Roller
RoUer ns G 3101-5S 41 Nomi·
081 Min.
2 Base ns G 3101 -55 41 db . D D, D, D, H H, H, h, h, h, h, h. f, r
I
"
3 Covel 5t.!'el plat e 150 150 240 220 L40 150 20 3 16 35 45 35 39 10 18 10 45
4 BudJ 200 190 24 3 21 45 55 40 48 10 20 LO 55
ns H 511l-BC 6 200 310 280 L8S
5 Axle 250 250 380 340 250 220 29 4 25 55 65 50 54 10 25 10 65
ns H 4 051 -5 2S C
6 300 300 440 400 300 240 30 4 30 62 70 55 53 12 30 12 75
Hexagon nut ns H 4051·5 25 C
350 350 500 4S5 350 260 33 4 35 68 75 60 55 16 32 16 85
7 Washer Steel plat e
40 0 400 56 0 52 0 4LO 280 40 5 40 · 75 80 65 60 19 35 19 90
8 Set screw Br3~ wire
450 45 0 620 580 450 292 46 5 45 78 80 70 65 19 35 19 90
9 Pan head machine screw BI;US bar
10 Boss Steel plate
11 Nomi· Rolle.r Base (reference) Bu ~h
Plug Br3..<S bar nal
die, r S w, w, b h I, f. r; d. D, D. D, h, h,
12 Set screw Brass wire
150
"
W 17 25 9 7 190 75 12 8 40 71 95 71 56 35 35
13 Grease nipple Brass
200 25 21 25 10 8 230 85 )4 10 40 95 L20 91 71 45 40
L4 Boss St eel bar or pipe 250 28 25 30 10 8 265 100 14 10 40 L07 145 107 82 55 50
15 Rib Ste el plate 32 28 12 10 320 100 16 14 60 127 165 12 7 97 62 55
300 30
16 Spacer S led pia te o r pipe 350 36 30 35 13 10 350 LOO 18 14 60 144 186 147 112 68 60
40 0 40 40 40 L4 12 380 LOO 20 16 60 161 208 163 128 75 65
Remark : ns G 4OS1-S25 C shall be subjected to properly heat treatment.
450 45 45 45 14 12 41 0 100 20 16 60 180 224 181 141 78 70

Bu!h Cover Washer Axl e and hexag on nut

Pan head
Nominal machine screw
dia. I. I, n, f.
'. No minal d I, d, d, d, d, d. L L,
App­ size of No .
fOX .) t/ueads

150 7 7 25 3.2 200 M6 6 80 7 60 90 70 55 M 39 206 40

200 8 8 26 3.2 300 M6 6 95 8 80 115 90 70 M 52 254 49
250 9 9 33 4.5 388 M6 6 110 8 90 L4 0 105 80 M 56 301 58
300 10 9. 5 35 4_5 495 M6 8 120 9 110 160 125 95 M 64 331 61
350 II 10 37 4.5 606 M6 8 135 10 125 180 14 5 110 M68 359 65
40 0 II 10.5 39 4 .5 755 M6 10 150 10 140 200 160 125 M 76 39 1 67
,
450 11 11 40 4 .5 868 M6 10 185 10 155 220 175 140 M 80 43 7 90

Axle and hexagon nut Set screw for bush Set SCIC"'iV for nut
Nom i­ Reference
nal Nominal Nominal Calculated
dia. L, L, L, L, L. L, L. L, r size of Length No. size of Length No. mass (kg}
threads threads
150 19 37 41 39 30 17 14 23 5 M6 12 4 M6 12 I 21.2
200 24 47 51 44 39 19 IS 31 7 M6 12 4 M6 12 1 37 .8
-
250 29 57 58 57 42 21 19 34 8 M8 20 4 M8 20 I 57 .9
300 34 64 63 62 47 23 20 38 8 M8 20 4 M8 20 I 88.5
350 39 70 67 68 50 25 22 40 I 9 M8 20 4 M8 20 1 131
400 45 78 70 75 56 28 2S 46 i 10 M8 20 4 M8 W 1 178
45 0 50 80 75 75 72 30 28 48 10 M8 20 4 M8 20 I 230

Remarks Tbe calcula ted rnass is for one rolle r excluding base.
- 174 ­
-1 75 ­
 F 2014.1987 F 2014·1987

Attached Table 6. Maurials for Closed Type, Cast Iron

Unit: rom
made
No. Compo nent Material

1 Roller ns G 5501·FC 20
- - ._ ­
2 hoe ns G 3101-5S 41

H3lf-roUIl d steel bar

3
4
Frame
Bosh
.. _-­ lIS G 3101-5S 41
11SR SIl I· BC6
60 x30
s A x le pin nS·G4051-525 C
-
II 6 Washer n S H5 11l -BC 6
PI
-­ - - - - - ~L _
7 Set screw Brass wil e

8 Lo cking plat e Steel plate

-
115 H 3250-e 3604 BD 0'
9 Lo cking bo lt C 3604 BE
~ ~ ' 1\
" - · · ~/ jJ 10 Grease nipple Bra s..~

.J ·--/ 1
.. ----­.. ts
~. J '

t$f
/'-\
-

h·
~
' \ .
.> /0
PT 1/8 or PF 1/8

Remarks: 1. The dimension marked with .. shall be determined according to the huU side hne. The construction , shape and 6,.
menslon s of base are shown for reference only.
2. Pipe thread s ' hall conform to ns B 0202 0,ns B 0203.

Fig . 3. Closed Type, Cast Iron made

- 176 - - ) 77 -
 F 2014-1987
F 2014·1987
Unit : nun
Attac hed Table 7. Detailed Dimensions of Closed Type, Cast Iron made
Unite mrn
Nomi- RoUer: Bush
nal
dja. D D, D, D, H h h, II, h, I r r r, r, D,
"
150 150 240 220 100 160 58 50 5 12 30 45 20 P 80 14 61
200 200 310 280 120 190 67 60 6 16 35 55 24 21 90 16 76
250 250 380 340 140 220 71 70 6 20 40 65 28 25 100 18 87
300 300 440 400 180 240 86 75 7 24 45 75 32 28 lI0 20 102
I
350 350 5 00 455 220 260 95 80 8 28 50 85 36 30 120 22 117 _ _ ~

'I L _
400 400 56 0 52 0 260 . 280 105 85 8 32 55 95 40 32 130 24 128 ~ .' j)
" -~I= '
~..'-f!
Norm-
""I
Bush Washer Axle pin Base (Refere nce)
an d frame ..- --­ U
dis. . D, r, I I, I, I, H, H, H, L
hi r. D, d d, l,

150 50 8 100 62 7 60' 70 io 21 7 46 101 10 167 2 190 200

200 60 8 .5 120 77 8 75 90 10 263 55 125 15 197 2 230 230
250 70 9 140 87 9 85 105 12 295 60 145 20 229 3 265 270 15
300 75 9 .5 180 102 10 100 125 14 331 65 160 25 249 3 320 300
350 80 10 220 117 11 115 140 16 351 65 17 5 25 269 3 350 350
400 85 10 .5 260 128 12 125 155 18 381 70 190 30 291 4 380 400

No mina l
dia.
L, L, L, D,
Base (reference ) and fram e

D. B I, t, r,
" W, W,
Set screw for bush
Nominal
.dze of Length
threads
No.
Locking
plat e

a
+£ff
~ ~
. -"
150 75 50 75 100 62 220 10 8 70 40 8 7 M6 12 4 25
200 75 50 75 120 77 280 14 10 70 40 10 8 M6 12 4 28
250 100 75 100 140 87 340 14 10 80 40 10 8 M8 20 4 35 , +~ ;
~ , 10
300 100 75 100 180 10 2 400 18 14 80 60 13 10 M8 20 4 40
350 llO 90 125 220 117 460 18 14 90 60 13 10 M8 20 4 45 PT 118 or PF 118
7 I
450 UO 90 125 260 128 520 20 16 100 60 14 12 M8 20 4 55
~Dl l
Reference
Locking plate Locking boll
Nominal Calc ulated mass tJ<g)
d la, Frame
b c t Nominal sue Onerolle.r
of threads Type SF Ty pe OF
150 45 24 10 M 10 28.5 43 .6 53.8
200 62 38 10 M 10 56 .9 74.4 103
250 80 50 12 MIO 97 .9 89.9 132
300 95 60 14 MI2 t 42 168 236
Remarks: I . Dlmenstcns marked with * shall be determinedaccording
350 105 70 16 MI2 2 ll 217 306 to the hu ll side line.
The construction, shap e and dimensions of the base are
400 125 80 18 M 12 284 294 415
shown for reference only.
2. Item No. 12 shall be fitted in six place> for each upper
Remark: The calculated massdoes not include that of base.
and lower part.
3. Pipe threads shall co nform to ns B 0 202 Or ns B 02 03.

Fig.4 Closed Type, Steel P late made

- 179 ­
- 178 -
F 20J 4-J9 81
F 20 14-1981
Attached Table 8. Materials for Closed Type , Steel Plate made
Attached Table 9. Detailed Dimensions of Closed Type, Steel Plate made
No . Cc mpo nem Material Uni ts rnrn
J Roll et lIS G 3101085 41
Nom;" Ro ller Bush
2 Base JIS G 3JOIo8S 41 110 1
D D, D. H h h. h, Mm . , r, I, D, h, I,
3 Frame, ns G 310 10854 1
dia. I " I.

I SO ISO 240 220 160 58 50 5 10 45 20 17 18 10 61 50 8

4 Bush ns H SI ll-Be 6
5
200 200 310 280 I J 90 67 60 6 JO 55 24 21 20 10 76 60 8S
Axl e pin l IS G 405l o8 25 C 250 250 380 340 220 72 70 6 10 65 28 25 25 10 87 70 9
6 Washer JlS H 5 Ill -BC6 300 300 440 400 240 86 75 1 12 75 32 28 30 12 10 2 75 9 .5
7 Se t scre w Brass wire 350 350 500 455 260 95 80 8 16 85 36 30 J2 16 117 80 10
8 Locking plate Steel plate 400 400 560 520 280 lOS as 8 19 90 40 40 35 19 128 85 lOS
450 450 620 5 80 290 105 90 8 19 90 45 45 35 - 19 141 90 10.5
9 Locking bolt ns H 325D-C 3604 BD 0 1
C 3604 BE
10 Grease nipp le BI3SS
No mi­ Washez Axle pin Base ( refere nce ) and frame
11 Boss S tee l baror pipe nal
d ia. D. D, I, d d, t 1 1, I, I, H, H, H, L L, L,
12 Rib Steel plate ISO 100 62 7 60 70 10 211 46 10 1 10 16 7 2 190 200 75 SO
13 Spacer S reel pla te or pipe 200 120 77 8 75 10 26 3 55 125 15 191 2 230 230 75 50
90
Remark: 250 140 87 9 85 105 12 295 60 145 20 229 3 265 270 100 75
ns G 4 05 l o825C shall be subjected to p roperly h eat trea tment.
300 180 102 10 100 125 14 331 65 160 25 249 3 320 300 100 75
350 220 117 11 115 140 16 351 65 175 25 26 9 3 350 350 110 90
400 260 128 12 1 25 155 18 38 1 70 190 30 29 1 4 380 400 110 90
450 280 141 12 138 170 20 410 75 190 30 300 4 410 450 12 5 100

Locking
Base (refer ence ) and Iram e Set screwlor bush p late
No muu l
dia.
, Nominal
L, D, D. B I. I, I r, '. "', w, size of Lengt h No. 0 b c
threads
i50 75 100 62 220 10 8 70 40 8 1 . M6 12 4 25 45 24
200 75 120 77 280 J4 10 10 40 10 8 M6 12 4 28 62 38
250 100 140 87 340 14 10 80 40 10 8 M8 20 4 35 85 SO
300 100 180 10 2 400 18 14 80 60 13 10 M8 20 4 40 95 60
350 125 220 117 460 18 14 90 60 13 10 M8 20 4 45 105 70
400 125 260 128 520 20 16 100 60 14 12 M8 20 4 55 125 SO
450 150 280 141 580 25 16 110 70 14 12 M8 20 4 65 135 90

Refere nce
Loc king boll
Nominal Caleuhted mass Ocil
d13. Nominal Frame
I, size of One roller
thread s Type BS TYpe DS
150 LO M 10 21.2 4 3.6 53 .8
200 LO M 10 35 .0 14.4 10 3
250 L2 M 10 52.1 89 _9 132
300 14 M 12 80 .6 168 236
350 16 M 12 11 7 217 306
400 18 M12 16 3 294 415
450 19 M 12 19B 509 650
Re mark: T he cal culated mass doe s no t includ e that of bas-e .

- 180­
- 181 ­
 :=: V>
en f'­ § !" ;8' g­ !" g-~ ~ 'T1
0 0.. . 3 '" o 0..
c:
~> ~ ~ o ~ 0 ~
~~ .6" " ::l. j5; g­ 0 ; £; v\. ..,....
~~ , ~ ~ ~
Bl .gen
i
'"ff ~ E!. fi s 3. ~ '~ 11 ~ . t- :l 0 la
5 .... ~ 0
(od ~ ""--l ~ ~
~ g. g. g ~ t! ~ g. ~

~ ~ 0
"
0­ 0
a: 0
;or '"
'" ~
n
rr.g ;a a
~ ~~2 g. o..~ . ~

f) '" ., " ~ . .. ~. ~ ~ F 0' ~ Ie

:0­ '" g ~ ~g, ~OQ ~ o' til

on ~ '" ~. 5' 5'

""" ~ g, ~ 0
CD- "
,,< ...0 E:
.g S' :=: 0..
[ s· .g '" f. ~ ' ~. ' ;. CD S· en j;;
~
g' -e ""
.,~ e: g f>O {j ~ ~ [
0­ ~ g. ~
r;0..
..,~ g ~ i<l ~. f> _
cw '"
~ 1l Z w., (')
g,~ -c ~ v­ ... ~
..., o ~ [ i­
- 9 o - "
~ S' -o ~
-o ~~
'"o~..g'"" §: ~ ,
., 0.. til
i" g-o. gog­ ~ ~ ",,"g " 0
[i;l g; S".0
~ go ~ '
<;­ g ~ s-..:. , a~. el '" a,
;t> "
[
go 0 o:J
0.
!l ...
;;:Q E-'" b '" ~
cr
s ·~
~ -e .,
~ "i!< ==
'" 0. '\: ~' £ g. '" 0­ " '""" e:
~ 0 <l ::
0
0­
~ ~ "";.
§ /,oj S' 0-12. ~
~!1
'< §'" f> ;.; ~e:
.,,,, ~
5'
i i""
,..'" ~ o '0
"'a" o 8-';: g­ (1)
~ '" ~ S' ~ ~­ (')
5­
" [f -o 0 ~
00 :;. a ~

N ~
-
I
~0
-e
~~ .... ~ on
~
c­
"E ~ ~ ~

;: ~
~
0
:r :;; ~= . ~
~ '" v; [ = tl O- -
n er
e Q C)
'" '" C) s· D
g if"
".
I­ g ..,[ ....C'l g ... "­ g.~ ..., S' ~ cr
~
~ IF " ..
o_ 0­ 1>
S [ a
..,. :;
.­ 0 av-
a §' rIO '
0 \" £~ til
er",
G
."
§ (; on
:c w
v­
-[
:n
(")
.e,
S c~ 0­
't:I
'2 "' 1;;' cr
..... 0
"''"... N ~
~r; 't:I
;r ~ ~ o ~ (1)
e ., 0.. sS-
l " ~.g .!" '0
'" .,
0 ~
t:a s· '"
c ~
i<l .g"""" t! '" 25f.
c ~ s j;; Il
~
'".
8. er

Je. go;. t­~

"" ~ '" ., ""f>

s: ~ ::3. ~ ~
~ o-t­ 8
Po o~ ., [ §:~
g' .,
o 0­ 'tI
F'
­" !. ~
0
..., '" 0 o 8' ~
0 ~
~ '"~ " ~. ., ..... ......
1f g. -g­ ?<,(l 'of' .....
til
o '"
- :;! \0
a­s ~ ~
~8. .!;! <xl
ff ""$'
~ '" -.l

~ UnJl:mm
_ _ _ _ "I J ..01

:...::=ttaSlml
---­ ----/
I
..()

2 B, b.

>(
~.1!t
', '
.
£
<>:
.~
~
'
=t:

! ! rtj\ "<:
r!'Fv ll! I / 'TV1 .::r:: Holdor hingepin f
-j~ ~­~,
00
-
w

Unit : mm
...
I
N.~~" " :Ei"~~ IBIB, I B, IH IH· IH , I L b I h, d I" Il I', I l'l l' ' .1 ' , I', TiT, i T' I T, T·1 r, T,
I r·1 r. 'r.. r" ,I" B, r. L.:'71 '~
40
38 - 40 336 230!1~6 37 8 ~ 1 3.QL S40 ~ ~ ~1 681123\ 19~L34J..!!! _ ~i.. U!!:?I .~Q.. 160i 270126J33-'. 62! 130 184 ~ ~ ~ ~ 15=1* 5 ~--.i.~ ~
44
42-44 366 252...!.Q!> . 41 2~~ ~!1~'~~ ~ 2£.. , ~! 1 351 ~! _
. 34J..!~ ~I ...!.!!lI .£.. 1 801 295! ~I J!_~..J ~i ~ 202 ~...£ 2 .~.~ ~~ ....!... ~ ----!QL
48
46- 46 397 273 JJS 450 213 155 640 62 79 30 62. 150 2301341159128 128155 I 190, 320126 I33 I 131 155 221 48 46 10 , 55. 17 . 3D ~ ~ 12 139
~ 50- 52 428 2 9 41~ 491 232 1701695 67 86 30 8811671247 ' 35 .170130.1 1391_ 631 2001-3451 26 I M I 82, 1701239 51 48 II L ~' IB .L~ ~ ~ 12 173
~2~ ~~L!~ ~ ~~. m ..1!.. ~ ~L~! ~2! ~_~_V~ 1821} .!.. 150 ~ 210' ..32Q1 ~1 ~1 _!!_;:I~! 258 ~ ...§2..~\~ 1 !~ 2!.. ...2... ...!Q.._1 3_ ~
60 58-60 1 4 ~_~' 3 3 61 ~1...lli1~ 19 5!.12!'i ~ ..YJl E.! ~~' ~!~, _~2..J ~I _~~_J..!~QI E.. I 2 301 395! ~I Jl!.. I ~ ~ 2761 ~ ~ ..Q..! ....2IJ 2 0 1 ~ ~ ...!!.. _13_~
__6_4_ 62 -.1!..1..i!2: 3571~: ~012-'!.~1~ 8 501...!!2...~ 3 4 1..!.09U.Ql!1 3 00I _±!.. I 2021 .1l.J ..Q!IB... I ~1 4 251 ~I ~i ~ 208 294 ~ ~...!£. ....2'! .1.!... .l!.. .lQ!~ 14 ~
"? ~L_~!?I.E2'.~1635~~I 220
.~!~I'~I. .! !~'- ­!~i 222~.1. ! ! _E. J. 21~.1!...I182~1~12701 45ol~I. .£I~ 3131~ ~1 ~ ~~ . B. . !.!.2 . Q. 1 14 1 ~

73 233
~ ~I~:~:~ 6151. 317IE!~ .22.....!.!!l ljt , ..!!~:...2~ 3121 _~1 _ 2 25!~1 ~; ~ ~ 4801~! ~I I07 3 3 3 .22- ~[...! ~ ~ .1!..1~ ~ ..!i..1_15_1~
78 I 76-7B I 617, 427: 1801 715/ 3381245,10201 95 1125142 1133' 255; 360, 49 i 240! 37 I206! 95 I 3101 510126 I48 I 1131245 --:J53! 74 I 72 1 \'I 108126 49 126115 16 551
RemArks: I. 1l 1e nominal diameter jn tho iablo den ote s the nominal diameter of lhe anchor chain
cable which the chaincable stOpp er will acccpl.. "ll
1. Dimension B, is. designed!l0 Lha.t lhe kentet i1 hackle iii led verticaJ ly in the ~IOOYD.
~
3. The calcul ated mass does not include Ulose of bar, hinge pi n llnd locking pi".
....'"
4. TIle figure shows the right opening onc . For len opening one a left opening bar .thall
be fitted.
~
Fig. I Dody
F 2015 -19 87 F 2015- 1987

Unit : mm
Counte rweight
Nominal
No. B D L H 1I
a b I t Calculat e d
mass Ikg)

~:: ::.
64 100 150 200 165 1 16
85 9
- 901-9
68 130 .180 250 200 30
- 73-­ .­ L.-.­ _
170 200 300 230 95 9 47
.­ 1-
78 200 200 400 290 90 90 100 9 57
1

UJlit: mtll.

"" Hinge 1)l11 LoCD l)f; PUl

Remerks: 1. The counterweight shall be made fro m steel plat e and steel bar.

~!
No=
~
~ I
Ref~ Il C f;
<Ul 2. The bracke ts asterisked may be atta ch ed to fit th e bod y and the bu.
No. L z, f----­
B
d
" r L. B. QI.~ l,l b l ~ d
&n '
0 L, d, a, d, Ir r Calculated D,
mass
I, d. r s, r, I, r; CalN Lued 3. A stop per shall be pro vided to ho ld the bar in ope n posi tion.
Il l}
I """
I
," (' <I
,
(Kg)

" •I
.0 390 6. 90 J O 26 lJ 70 135 136 s
,."
36 j... JJ 0.76 36 176 2' 6 6 to ;0 0.66
44
40
424 66 1' 00 J.o 26 33
460 66 I" O '0
16 205 155
26 lJi'" 22S 11S J'
36 "0 '0
I~ 6 172 2&
6
6
JJ . 0
lJ 0 17
,7 0.81

0.08
36 188 25
36 202 : 25 I
I6
ft. I
•
6
to
10
50 7

1
0.71
076
Reference Figure Counterweigh I
'0
'2 494 68 11. l O 26 r 34 92 245 ] 95 41 36 J82 28
• 33 . 11 0.91 36 212 6 I
'6 S30 10 11' 30 26 lS 98 26' 210 '9 36 18. zs 6
1 33 . 17 0.96 loS m ilS
" 6
6
6
10 'O ! 1
10 7 I
0.80
0. 84
60 '64 16
"' J2 26 18 102 285 zzs 61 ss 20' 30 S 33
' I' 1.1 7 l 8 12361 '"
, 7 , II
'0
54
' I 1.10
64

6'
71
636 ..
600 SO 140 34
ISO l6
673 90 160 40
26 '0 1l 0 jl OO 240 1

26
26
" 11 6ino,m
"
45 '2' 340 1210
• •1
44 216
46 j22S l4
n 8
0
s
l6
39
10 1 8
10 s
ai
I
US
l 72
44 ,25 ' \ ' 0
46 210 1J2
8
0
s
s
12 60
13 66
i 0
3
LJ 7
1.6 ,
104 ' 0 1" 2 13 42 10 i" jJ6 s
13 120 96 170 42 26 , s I
2.26 SO 9
I•
9 14 70 2.21

Remarks:
" 123 360 I28S l2S 52 12" 40 45 10 1.M
" 300 38 9
" 16 a 2.61

L The locking pin shill be tied to the body with a chain or me like.
2. The split pin for the hinge pin shall co nform to ns B 1315, and the washer 10
.IIS B 125 6_
3. The FiguI~ shows the right opening one (R). For 10ft openin g one, the positi on of
handle bar shall be reversed right-hand side left .

Fig. 2 Bar, Hinge Pin and Locking Pin

Reference Standards'
US B 1256 - Plain Washers
ns B 1351 - Split Pins
lIS F 3303 - Flam Butt Welded Anchor Chain Cables
lIS G 3101 - Rolled Steel for General Structure
1IS G 3505 - Low Carb on Steel Wire Rod s
JIS G 4051 - Carbon Steel for Machine Struct ural Use
JIS G 5102 - Steel Castings for Welded Structure

-184­ -1 85 ­
 1IS
F 20 16-1981 F 2016 ·19 87 P 2016-1 981

Cast Steel Pawl Type Chain Cable Stoppers

. Appearance
for Grade 2 Chain Cable
The sur face of chain cable sto pper shall be smooth and free from det rimental blowh oles, casting fins, sand
h akings, et c. Machined sur face' 'roll be free from det riment al defect s, uneven finish, et c.
1. Scope When the 'i de walls of the body are mad e from steel plate, the welding shall be sound.

This Japanese Indnstrial Standard specifies ships' cast n eel pawl-type anch or chain cable stoppe rs app licable b. Designation
10 Grade 2 anchor chain cable specified in lIS F 3303 (hereinafter referred to as " anchor chain cable sto pper"),
be assumed that j oinin g shackles o r kenter shackles are used for joining lengths o f chain of nomin al numb ers up Th e chain cable stopper shall be designated by the title, type and nomina l number. lIS number may be used
t o and including 68 , and kenter shackles are used for nominal num ber 73 and over . In place of the title.
ElWlIple: Cast Steel Pawl-Type Ancho r Cham Cable Stopper> (or Grade 2

Remark : In this standard, units and numer ical values in [ ] ace in accordancewith the Conventional
Anchor Chain Cable, Type A 60 or 1IS P 20 16 A 60.

System of Units, andgiven for reference only.

2. Classifica lion

The chain cable stopp er shall be classified as given in Table I according to the apply condition. Reference Standards:
1IS F 3303 - Electrically Welded Anchor Chain Cables
Table I
lIS G 3101 - Rolled Steel for General Structure
Type Apply ing condition lIS G 40S I - Carbon Steel for Machine Structural Use
JIS G SlOl - Carbon Steel Castings
A j oining shackles Or kent er shackl es -are
led horizo nt.tlly over the traek. 1I S H SII I - Bronze Castings

B Kent er shackles can be led vertlcal ly o ver

the track.

3. COnstruction, Shape and Dimensions

The const ructio n, shape and dim ensions shall be a, shown in Figs. I and 2 and shall conform to the follow.
ing requirements :

(I ) The Side walls of the body may be of steel plate welded construcu ou. In that case the thickness
of steel plates and oth er factors shall be determined so that they have a Strength equivalent to tha t of
cast steel made ones.
(2) For easy o peration of the pawl, it is recommended that a counte rweight Or the like be pro vided. In this
case th e siritable physical force necessary for o peratiou is about 250 N [25 .5 kgf}, Where a count er­
weight Or the like is not provided, a handle shall be fitt ed suita bly 10 the point of pawl.
(3) It is recommended to equi p a lockin g pin to kee p the pawl in closed position. Where a count erweight
is provided , it is also recommended to eq uip anothe r locking pin t o keep the pawl in open position .

4. Materials
The mat erials shall be as given in Tabl e 2.
Table 2
No. Component Material
I Bod y ns G 5101·SC 42
2 Bush J JlS H 5lJl·BC 6
3 Set screw Bruss wire
4 Paw] JlS G SlOl·SC 42
S P3W} axle ns G 4051·S 3S C
6 Hexagon head bolt and nut JlS G 3101· SS 4 1
7 Grease nipple Bras.s
Remark : ns G 4051-5 35C shall be subjec ted 10 pr operly
h eat treatment .

- 186 ­
- 187 ­
 F 2016-1987
F 20 16-1987

~Jll . 'll lf)! ~ II I~ I~ I i 1 ~ 1 ~ 1§

~q!" 2 2 1=1~ ~ I: : I~ ~ I ~ I ~ 2
tI-" iE ~ ~ !!l ~ I§ ~ I!! !! l £l l ~ § ..:>1
~II .. li .' ~ !l ...
l:'l g . 11 -S 1-2 1­ ~ I lll
... 1-'1 -Sl

r.
_ ~ i m l ~ l ~ ~ 12 2/2 1212 ¢d
~ ,,; 11I 10: 1>: §i;; i=I !! 1~ I~I~IS
1
I
1
" 11 l:l I~ H ~ ~ I~ I ~. I~l:; 1~
"l

" ~ 121;;­1 ~ I~ : I" I ii I~ I~ l:l

il Ii I ~* i!
I ) ._
1 I - __ -s,

'" :;: 1;; I;; I :; I :>. 1o:J ~ I ~ I :;; I ~ I::; I s

I I I
I I I
-:l l~ ;~r; I 1 I
30\ 1- - - - - ~ - ,, - - - - - - - - -~} II I :
~ " il~ I~ I;; iil iil l!! I~ 1 ~ illl!! l;; ~ . I
-
I
I
I
~ 1O I il l;t I\; I ~ I; ,I i:1 I l'l ;; I ;; I ~ I ~ ~ ~!

J!
c

< ~t~ I;;I= 'E I'li= I~ 1 ~ I ~ I ~ ! N <i5

-1-___

/
, LL
r::J 1

.
-
, \
t

:
1

I
.0

c ; I;; I~ It; Is I'is I:: I::l I 11 I~l ~ ~ ! ~ / v \I

O}I=i~ I~J:: I: i: I: I: I : I:-,: : f ~

I
I I I
I ' I
'1 ~ -,!
\, ~ r;r;i- I' IIIII III I I' IIII ~ ~
,lr
W­
!: I

~ ~ 1~ 1= lll Il\ I~ I~ I!i I;; j;: H S ! 1

I
I
I
II ""~
I
I I
I
1
,I
0 .;' ~ 1:: ,1 1~ 1:; );' 1 $ 1~ 1 i I ~I ~I ~ .~ ~
r- ;; 1 ~ 1~ 1;; 1i1 11i 1 ~ 1~ 11' 1 ~1 i! 1 ;; ~ ~ Urul: nun
~ g 12 1.: I:; I:fl~ I;; I~ I 1: I:! I~ Ifl ~ ~ Normnal cul2t ed
.: ~ I; ~ 1;: 1! 1~ 1~ lil l ~ I ~I :!I ~ :§ <i5 Nominal (~ 2
db.. of mass

.: ~ I~ I~ Ii>! !;; III I~ I~ I ~ ~1 ~ I~ ! :3 No. 0:2 1

I (1 ) , bolt ( kg)

1 - ~ I:; :; 1:i ig :l1 l~ :I I ~ I ~ I § I ! j :;

oJ ~ 1~ li l~ I~ I~ I~ iE I ~ I ~ I ~I ~ '0 ~
<; :! ~ i" I:l Ig Iso Ii1 \ ~ I :: 1:;1:: I=
;
pi I*I~ I~ I~l ~ I~ I ~ 1:1 1*I~ i
[~ ~ I~ ~ I~ ,~ I~ I'! ~ I ~ I~l ~ I~
<; ;;

i
lIi I~ I=I:: III I~ I: I; l :l ;: I=i
g: 51 ~
I-I~ ;; Ii:1 i § I' I' I [ I I ' I 1' 1' II g
I

'" aI~ I~ I~ I~ I;; I~ I!! I ~ Iill ;! Ii! ~

jUt ~ r r rr r r r rr rr r rr r L k~ ~fW - J
j: ; s I~ 1~ I~ I~ I;t I Ii:1 =is I=Is
& 1 Fig. 2 Pawl

- 189 ­
- 188 ­
 JIS

F 201&-1987 F20t7-1982
When! count erweight etc . is not provided
Panama Chocks

I. Scope
Thi s Japanese Industrial Stan dard specifies Panam a choc ks fOJ ship u se.

2. Classification

Tha Panam a chocks shall be classified as given in Tabl e.

Table
Countuweight Typ e Materi al Applicanon

~Handle hloPpe.r
( ~y be ext ended to COnnect
both <ide w.1I»
AC
AP
Be
Cast steel
Slee l plat e
Cast steel
To be fitte d to the deck

To be fitt ed to the bul wark

BP St eel plate
\ Stopper
( May be extended to co nnec"!
both <ide walls)

Remark: Th e coun terweight may be pr ovided .. both ends of the spindle . 3. Construction. Shap e and Dimensions

Th e const ruction. shape and dimensions shall be as shown in F igs, I to 4.

Ref erence Fig. 1 Counterweight-Typ e Pawl Operating Device

4. Materials
Th e materials shall co nform to liS G S101-5C 4 2 and JIS G 3101 ·SS 41 or JIS G 3 106-SM 41.

S. Designation

Pan ama chocks shall be designated by the title, type and nom inal size. 1IS numb er may be used in place of
Screw block 1W 30 or the ritle.
M S2 X 2 (1W : lefl 'b anded "'lew)
Examp le: Panama Chock, Type AC 3 10 or JIS F 2017 AC 3 10
Grase nipple

Reference Standard s :

l iS G 3 101 - Rolled Steel for General Stru ctur e

1IS G 3 106 - Rolled Steel for Welded Structur e
JI S G 5101 - Carb on Steel Castings

Remuk : Irrespccuv e of 3. (2), it is reco mmended that the opera ting Coree of the handl e o f
screw-type pawl operating device be 4() N 14.1 k gil or Iess.

Reference Fig. 2 Screw-Type Pawl Operating Device

- 190 - - 191 -
 F 2017-1982

F 2017- 198 2

Unit : rom

UniL : mm

~ I, I L'II

N orn i­
lL31 L
L,
T I
Unit; mm
size
I I L, u , H,
H'I H, I I I
v'"
D , Re ferenc
R,
R R, R, K
IT
-'"'-4 '""~~~ MH
~
310
310
199 / R, /

~,
Calc ulate d
.J6Q I mass (kg)
360 200

-,",--,",-1
~ 142J 19J~
M' 140

32 253

mf"1 t~ ~
400
-450
---400

450
202

203

""
150
sso -'"'- ,.
400 804 750 44 642 :;4S
'00
202 ~ 235 1­
138

140~ 1:;
f-~
34
289

'~~
134

500
500 I 204
mlm
~ I~I. ~ Id ~ ~ ~ ~ I m
I--­
132
134 182 20

--~
36

38

323

351
Unit: mm
130
132 ISO 20
I~
40 J 395
I

Nomin al ~ Reference
Fig. 1 Type AC L L, L, L, L, Calculated
size
I I
i mass (kg)
310
3 10 L~! 155 I 670

620 I
190

360
360 I 110 I 180 -r 720
670 [ ' 207

• I Letters In bo ldface 'how the specifled dimensions , and ot. he rs.

Re marks. . tile referen ce dimensions . . . . ease the quantity ,I
2. The db may change (he pOSJ(lOn Or -mcr
necessary .
Fig.2 Type AP

- 192 ­
-193 ­
 F 2 01 7 ·L982
F 2 017 ·1982
Unit: mm

UnH: rum

~s__
--1---.:-'
1 .­ :r.!
'>.(

.-_-':'1

4=j~~----t =====S::j 1
f<-­ - b-_J- - - ­ - - ­---J
Uni t: mm
Norni- f Refe rence
I f
nal
size
L
I L
j
M -I L , I D H, H, H, R,
I I R, R, ) D.
KIT I C.rna"lcu laledD'I
,--­ Unit: mm

I!
(kg) Reference
I I Nominal
~I~t ~ J2 [ 684 1 462 1 :>12 1 231 1~Hi-: 1 9 5 1~ _~ 2__
L L, L, Calculated mass
734 38 I 212' 276 SIZe (kg )

-""---'" '" ~I-",--,"-I '"/ '" -'" I M' ,-'" L~ _~,""

~~~ I~I I ~4 _ ~ 692 1~~G ! ~ ~
aos
310

360
3\0

360
702
752
I
I
620
670 I
184
193
~ ~ I Z37 I H2
750 235 ---;SS1 20 , 36 - 314
450 450 218 886 1 802 218 696 474 1 132 ' LV 20 38 385 1. The sto pper marked Wi th ~ in the figu re rna>' not be fitt ed if the purchaser so wishes.
-;05oorm i----;O~1----:;s2io r70or--:;18 1 80-r2oT-~o l -~n
R emark s.
<-5 0 m ['L:iO 130 i 2. Letters in boldface show the specified dimensi ons.
Remark: The stop per marked with ~ in thls figure may n e t be 1111 Cd If the purchaser so wishes. 3. The nb may change the pcsl uo n OJ increase the quan ti ty If necess ary.

Fig. 3 Type Be Fig. 4 Type BP

- 195­
- 194 ­
 JIS
F 2018 -1976
F 20 18-1976 F 2018-197 6
Bollards (Sim ple T yp e )

Unit: mm
1. Scope

Tim J apanese Industrial St andard spec ifies bollards o f sim ple construc tio n fo r ship use.

2. Construction , Shape and Dimensions

The const ru ction, shape and di me nsio ns shall be as shown in Figure.

3. Mate rials

The mater ials shall be as given III Ta ble:

Tab le
No. Compo nent
Material
I Btrt 3
2 Capping piece Oetnfu of Plug Weld
3 Basep la te rrs G 3106·SM 4 1 orJlS G 3101.SS 41
4 Rib

4. Insp ecti on

4 .1 Visual Inspe ction Each part shall be well Jinished and free fro m any rem arkabl e flaw, d eform at ion and
othe r detrimen tal d efects.

4.2 Dimen sion Inspeetio n Dimensio ns shall co mply WIth (he requ iremenrs of 2.

5. Designa ti on
Unit mm

title. 11,e ho lla rds shall be deSIgnat ed by Ihe tille and nom inal diameter. JIS lIumbe r may be used in place of the
- Bin I Cavr;ii.. &septa Ie
RIb
_ _ '_ ~? Plug weld JWoro~f3pe
Wire rope Calcu­
Nomi­
N 0-2 1 , ~··4
lated
e xample: Bollard, (Simp le type) 75 or 1IS F 2018 -75 nal
D H b I) V I ( min. I 1 I, weld /w «s Hemp
rope (6 ~'f~ ~ 6 ;4 )
mass
dia.
I to
( min.
II B L ( rn: n.) h m.i n. e No .
I l~
Marking
6.

al dIameter and mauufaciu rer's name or abbreViat ion fo r It shall be ma rked On the readi ly visible place
-
7S

100
is I 16S 6 270 I 100 6 lIS 3Jl5 I 6 I I 6 I I ~ :: I lOS I II:::
on theNomin
bollards, -
125
ISO
li S

• 225

2SO

Remarks. . size app licable t o rhe botlard .

1 Diamet er of rope show' the maxrmum 1IS G 3525 and hem p rope to JlS L 2701.
2: For applicable lop es, wire rope sball conform to

Referen ce Siandards :

JIS G 3101 - Roll ed Stee l for General Structure

Figure
JIS G 3106 ­ Rolled St eel fOr Welded Stru eture
JIS G 3525 - Wire Rop e
lIS L 2701 - Hard and Bast Fibre Ropes

- 196 ­
- 197 -
 JIS

F 2019-L979 F 2019 .1979

F 2019- L9 79
Small Size Cast Iron Deck End Rollers

1. Scope

This Ja pane se Indu strial Stand ard speci fies small size cast iron dec k end rolle rs 10 be used on shi ps fo r 5. Inspection
mooring , ca rgo or boar handli ng etc,
5.1 Visual Inspection Every part shall b e finished soundly and shall be free from flaws, blowh ol es and
o ther detriment al defects. Th e roller s shall rot ate smoothl y.
2. Classification
5. 2 Dimensi onal Inspection Th e dim ensi ons shall confo rm to the requirements of 3.
The d eck end rollers sh all be classifi ed int o the th ree t ypes , A , B I and B 2 accordi ng to th eir configuration
as shown in Figure.
6. Designation

Type A
Type Bl Typ e B2 Th e de ck end roll er shall be designa ted by the title and ty pe. lIS num ber may be used in place of the IiIIe.

Example: Small 51ze Cast Iron D eck end Roller, Typ e A or JIS F 2019 A

7. Marking
The diame ter of roller and manufactnr er's nam e or abb reviation for It shall be mar ked On a readil y visible
part of the body.

Figure

Reference Standards:
3. Construction , Shape and Dimensions
llS B I 11 7 - Slotted Head Set Screws
The construction, sha pe and dimensions shall be as sho wn in Att ached Figs. I and 2, and shall con for m 10 JIS B 1180 - Hexag on Head Bolt s
the following requirement s: 115 8 1575 - Grease Nipple s
115G 3101 - Rolled Steel for General Structure
(1) Type A and Type B I shall b e as sho wn in Attached Figs. I and 2 respectively, and Type B 2 shall be the
lIS G 5501 - Grey Iron Cast ings
same as Type B I except that t he positi ons o f the vert ical roller and the horn are interchanged . ( See JIS H 3250 - Co pper and Copp er Allo y Rods and Bars
Figure 2 .)
1IS H 510I - Brass Castings
(2) The bol l shall conform to Ir S B 1180.
J IS H 5111 - 8 ronze Castings
(3) Th e se l scre w shall conform to liS B 1117 .
(4) The grease nippl e sha ll conform to JfS B 1575, A·PT t
4. Materials

Th e materials shall be as given ill Tabl e:

Table

No . Component Mat erial

I Bod y
2 Horizc ntal roljer JlS G SSOl-F C 20
} Verti cal roller
4 Bush
JlS H S 11I ·BC 6 or
5
6
B ush

Horizontal roller axle

1 JlSHSI01-Y BsC2

ns G 3101·SS 41
7 Vertical roller axle
8 Washer
- Brass p late
9 Locking plate Steel plat e
10 Hex agon head bo lt
I Brass Bar
-
11 Set Screw
I Wire
22 Grease nipple lIS H 32SG-CJ60 2BE or C3602BD

- 198 ­
-199 ­
 F 101 9-19 79 F 10 19-197 9

Unit: m.m

@ 10 Unit: m.m

10 M8 Bolt

6
5 - </> / 8 Countersunk bole

35 240 3/ Section AA

1/ M4x8
Remark s The dlmenskm s of the par ts except body shall be the same as these of Type A.
Reference: Calculated mass, 22 .9 kg (Typo B I and Type B 2)

12 A-PTt Grease nip ple to be Im od

bi,q
. ">'"
Attached Fig. 2 Type 'B I

20 -, 6

'
Reference: Calculated m ass, 26.4 kg.

Attached Fig. 1 Type A

- 200 - - 201 -
 JIS
F 202().1979
F l02(). 1979
F 20 20-1 979

Small Size Steel Plate Deck End Rollers 5. Insp ection

5. 1 Visual Ins pection Every pall shall be flIlished soundly and shall be flee fr om flaws , crac ks and o ther
l. Scope de tri mental defects . Th e roll ers sha ll rot ate sm oot hly.

Thi s Japanese lndu stnal Standard specifies sm all size steel p lat e deck en d rollers {a be used on sh ips fo r 5.2 Dim ensi onal Ins pection T he d imensions shall co n form to th e req uirements of 3.
moori ng, cargo o r boa r ha ndling, e tc,
6. Designation
2. Classification The deck end roll er shall be d esignated by the ti tle an d type . JlS numbe r m ay be used in pla ce of th e title,

The deck end rollers shal l be classified i nt o t he thr ee type s, A, B I 3J1d B 2 accord ing to th eir co n figurat ion E"""ple: S", >USize 5[ee1 Plate Dec. end Roller T ype A, or J IS F 2020 A.

as shown in Figur e.

7, Marlcing
Type A Ty pe B I Type B 2
T he d iamete r of ro ller and the ma nufac tur er's name o r abbrevia tion for it shall be mar ked o n a readily visible
pa r t of th e body

Referen ce Stan d ards:

JI S B 1117 - Sl otted Head Set Screws
JIS B 1180 - He xago n He ad Bolts
Figure JIS B 1575 - Grease Nipples
JJS F 20 19 - Sma ll Size cast [ron Deck end Roll ers
JlS G 3101 - R olled St eel for Gen er al St ru et ure
3. Construction , Shape and Dimensions JlS G 3452 - Carbon Stee l Pip es fOI Ord inary Piping
The con stru ction, sha pe and dim en sions shall be as shown in Attached Figs. I and 2, and shall co nform to JlS G 345 4 - Carbon St eel Pipe s fo r Pre ssur e Servi ce
th e fo llowing requirements: JlS H 32 5 0 - Co ppe r and Co pper Alloy Rods and Bars
JIS H 51 01 - Brass Castings
(I) Ty pe A and T ype B I Shall be as shown in A tta ched Figs. I and 2 respe ct ively , and Ty pe B 2 shall be JIS H 5 11 1 - Bron ze Cast ings

th e same as Type B I except that the posit ions of th e vert ica l roller and th e hom are inler ehanged .

(See Figure 2 .)

(2) T he horizont al and ver tical rollers may be of cast iron as spe ci fied in JIS F 20 19 .
(3) Th e boll Shall co nfor m 10 JIS B I 180 .
(4) The se t screw shall co nfo rrn to JlS B 11 17.
(5) Thc grease nipple shall co nfo rm 10 JlS B 157 5, A.PT t

4. Mat erials

The m aterials shal l be as given in Ta ble:

Table

No . Compo nent Material

I Body ns c 3 101 ·SS 4 1
2 Horizon tal roller
ns G 3452·SGP 0 1
3 Verticalroller 1IS G 3454·STPG 38
-
4 Bearing
5 Ho rizont al roller axle 1IS G 3 1Ot -SS 41
6 Ver tical ro ller ax le

7 BIUh 1ISH s n r-sc 6 0 1

I 115 H 510\ ·YBsC 2
8 Lo cking plate Stee l plate
9 Set screw Wire
10 Wa sher Brass p late
11 He x agon head bo lt I Brass bar
12 C rease nipple i JlS H 325 ().(;.l60 2BE o r C360 2BD

- 203­
- 202 ­
F 202().1979 F 202().J979

Unit: msn
Unit: mm

qO i: I .
.l.-.-lL
I 10

10

-@ I 2
10

~r8
(?) and @
I
244 (Horizontal roller)
~6
134 (Vertical .oUerl

I 0

ltemuk: The dimensions of the parts except body ih311 be the same as those oIType A..
Referene e: Cetculeted mass, 17. 7 leg (Type B 1 and TYpe B 2)

q M4 x 8
Attached Fig. 2 Type B 1

@ A-pr ± GIC350 nipple

to be fitted

Reference: Calculated mass, 20.6 leg..

Attached Fig. t Type A

- 204­ - 20 5 -
 lIS

F 2021-1976 F202 1-1976 F 2021-1976

SmaU Size Fairleads

Atta ched Table J Principal ~Ollll of Small Size Fairlea.ds

1. Scope
Unit: rom
This Japanese Industr ial Standard specifies small size Iarrleads used for moo ring ships. etc.
O>< ~ eepe
Cotte 'PO_rt~e :-C:: wire

2. Classification CIas>
NQm"
...
olla.
D L I I, i,
po"''''
diI . oC
"'lIoN
(Hert­ H=' I~:tic ~rope
rope No.2 ~
C:LIculaUd
mass
(ttl

The falrleads shall be classified as given in Table:

~~)
rope (6)12) (6)<24)
0-2 75 20 I. 8 6
I I

~
Table 15 7.\ <.10 Z30 100- R.04
100 26 18 to 8
CIas> Nominal diame ter mm - - r--­ f-­ - ­ I---­ - -- I I
0 -2
C-2
75,
75.
100
100
100 100 530 290 120 -
125 35
I I 25 12 10
lIU
ISO 40 16 12
0- 3 75, 100 I I 28

C-3 75. 100

C·2 75 20
I
I.
I 8 6

~
75 75 5SO , 230 - 160 11.9
DO-2
100, 150
130,
- - ----­ - --­
100 2<1
I 18 10 8
Remarks: 1. In the codes represent ing type s, the rust p lace letter '''0 ''
125 35 12
stan ds for "open type", "C" COl "c losed type" and uDo"

for "o pen deck end roller typ e"

100 100 110 290 - 210 I 25 to
29.7
ISO 40 28 16 12
2. The second p lace figure deo notcs th e n umber of ro llers.
- - ---­ - - ­ ' .. - - r--­
-~

0-3 75 00 I. 8 6
3_ Construction, Shape and Dimensions

~
75 75 660 230 100 - 12. I
The construct ion, shape and dimensions shall be as given in Figs. I to 5 and Attached Tables 1, 2, 4 and 6. 100 26 18 10 8
.­ .- -. - - - ­
4. Materials 125 35 25 12 10
100 100 820 290 120 - --­ 27 . 3
Th e materials shall be as given in At tached Tables 3 , 5 and 7. ISO 40 28 16 12

5. Designation 75 20 I. 8 6
C-3 I I I
The fairlead shall be designated by the trtle, type and nominal diamet er. JlS num ber may he used 10place of
75 75 180 230 - 160 -­ -­ - - - --­ 17.0

Ir­ . t. 100 26 18 10 8
the title.
r. L
- ill Lill\ I
Exampl e: S"",U Su e Fairlead 0 -2-100 or llS F 2021-0-2-tOO
I 125 35 25 I' to

l
100 IQO 1000 290 - 210
28 16 12
40.0
150 40
- f - - - f---- . ..
125 35 20 I 12 10
- 45. 0
~2 ~ 100 100 560 300 -
ISO 40 2' 16 12

nr- I I ..n 130 130 740 40() - -

17 ~ S<J 32 18
20
16 i
18
93.0
- JE~. -~f.:Ji
200 55 36
.­ - _.­ - _ .
--­ - - I­
~ ~;- -­
f--­ 1-
235 24 20
l ISO 150 roo 440 - - llS. O
300 75 46 28 22.4
Reference St andards :
JIS B 0205 - Metric Coarse Screw Threads

JIS B 1101 - Slotted Head Machine Screws

R emarks : 1. Deta ils of Ialrleeda shall con form to Figs. 1 lo-5.
lIS B 1111 - Slotte d Head Set Screws
2. Where the base h3..S curved bottom [0 frt t he fo rm of the hull part where
lIS B 1180 - Hexagon Head Bolts the Iairlead is.to be install ed, as in the bow . stern , etc., the length of base L

JIS B 1515 - Grease Nipples shall be meeJured on it9 face- along the line containing the ceotres o f roll ers..

JlS G 3J01 - Rolled Steel for General Structure 3. Th e corre spon ding dlamere r of bullar d and the diam et er o f rop e are given for

JIS G 3454 - Carbon Steel Pipes for Pressure Service refer ence only.

ns G 4051 - Carbon St eel for Machine Struct ural Use 4. Th o dimensions L , I, /1 and 1'1 may be modified accordl ng to the cond itio n

ns G 550J - Grey Iron Castings of Installa tion.

JIS H 3422 - Free Cutt ing Brass Rods and Bars
5. In the calculated mass. that of the base I. no, included, except for D0-2.
JI S H 3423 - Brass Rods and Bars Suitable fo r Forging

JIS H 5 III - Bronze Castings

- 206 ­ - 201­
P 202 1-197 6 P 2021.1 976

At tached Table 2 Open Type

Unil : mm

Roller [ B", e
Nominal
dia.

0 "I I D. I ~ 0;
I
I

I
u H1 r hi
i
'. 'a ,
""
"5 t I
I
. t: ' 1 r., f. b
,
,
70 7. i I'" n o I re •• 75 '0
I
a, 11 1 '3 17 20 to 12 23
I 23 '0 a 9S I S7
100 LOO ! 160 1 $0 I 94 54 100 B '2 23 30
I 23 zs 20 18 30 .0 13 Jl 125 159

Base Bush Cover Wa.sba

'. 1~ ID. I 0.1 ~ ! .

No mi na l I Round head

d ia.

" "! b. Hoi 's 'a

machin e screw
• 4

, I ' . S I 'lO i II
'" i 12
No mina! size o f Num­
screw threads be'

7' [ OS SO 3. 2' [ ] 7 II 11 3 1.' '0 M" .xO.7 • <0 ' .2

s !"'[ .8\ .. 37 I 23 I , .S 90 M4 ](.0.7 e •. s

' 00 B [ 47
I
23 s 14
"
Spindle and nu I
Nominal
dia, ., I

d, ~ I~ ..
li om1.Q:a.l sta e of
scr ew l.breads
I
I '" I
~ L:l 4 Lo Lo Lo
Leg lengt h

.
of we ld

,. '"
L La f9

7; ao I 4~ as I 28 M'" 1lI Z8 11 18 20 zo 8 8 I' 2

•
' 0. 40 I 60 46 I 36 M24 148 3' 18 2S 3S 27 21 11 11 18 s 5

set sc rew Cor; bwlh Set screw fo r nut

Nomina l
d ia . Nominal size Num­ Nominal size
Num­
of Screw Length of SCrew Lengt h
b er be'
thr eads threads

75 lIl3 x.O_5 8 • M3x 0 . 5 8 1

100 M,4.10 . 7 8 2 M4.x O. 'l' 8 1

Remarks: 1. The screw threads on plug @ and on d s shall co nform to lI S B 02 05.

2. Round head machine screw shall co nform (0 .liS B 110 1.
3. Se t scr ew shaU co nfo rm to Jl S 8 11l 7.

Attached Table 3 Open Ty pe

No . Component I MateriaJ
1 RoU", i Jl S G SSOH C 20

2 Base JIS G 3 10 1-SS 41

I
Slee l plat e
3 Cove r
I, -- ­ .
4 B ush ,, 1IS H SIlI·Be 6

S Spind le
JlS G 4051 ·S 2S C
6 N ut
7 Washer I Sleet plate
Rematks: 1. The dimens io ns marked wi th shall be determined according to hull side
nne.
It-
8 Set SCTe'N' I Brass rod
2. Th e cove, shall be galvanized . 9 Round head machin e screw

3. The to p and inner middle hollow s of roll er shal l be filled up with grease. 10 Boss Slee l plate
- --
11 Plu g I Brassrod
Fig. 1 Open Type 12 Se L !Ict CW

13 Grease nl pp le I ns H 3422-B;BMD or B;BME

Rem ar k: Grease ni pp le <hsJl co nfo rm to lI S B 1575-A·PT 1/ 8.

.; 208 - - 209 ­
" 2021 -197 6 " 202 1-1976

Unit: mm

Half rou nd
steel bat

n
II
' I
II
II
II
: I
J I

II
I I
II
II
I" I
II
II
II I I
II
II
LL... _ I:I '

~
R.emark:
- ­ - --- - ------ - -~~- - ---
The dim ens ion marked with · shall be determ ined acco rding to
-- ~-1
• t ._
hull side line.
HoI. Ior M6 round h ead
machine .saew / i
/
~ ~

Fig. 2 Closed Type

Atta ched Table 4 O osed Type

Unit : mm Fig. 3 Closed Type
Roller Bush Washer

.... . • . .. '.•
Nominal
db .
D 0, Dz Os H b h, b. e r ... "'­ 1':J '4 Ot h,
" Os Do Atta ched Table 5 Closed Type
""
.'" .. .
u. 2.
....
1S 15 UO 50 '0 1.1 3 6 IS '0 S 3£ 7
No. Comp onent Material
'00 '00 '"" '50 OS '08 50 · 33 4 8
'" U U 53
• ~ s
• I Rolkr JIS G 550 H C 20

2 Bu.
No minal Spindle Base and frame JI S G 3101 ·SS 41

... • ... ., .,'.

Frame

.
db. 3
6,
.
d r H, L L, B B, Dr t;; rs
dl
"
l
" " '" \0
4 Bush JlS H 51 11-BC 6
15

'00 .. 30

40
0

7
US

'00 .
25

1
53

70
"
25
•8

11., . ..
50 os no
1<0
35

00
110

150 125
os

• • .. 3G
5
6
Spindle
Walhel
1IS G 4051 -S 25 C
nS H5111·BC6
Base and frame Set screwfor bu sh 7 Set ,crew Brass rod
NomiJu1
d ia, Half round Nominal size o f
s•eet bar screw thread s Length Num ber 8 Round hel d machine saew
75 30 x 15 M3 x 0. 5 • , 9. Grease nipple
lIS H 3422 ·BsllMD Or BsllME

'00 40 J: 20 ill. oR. 0.1 • Z

Remark: G'e:l.'Ienipple shall conform to JIS B 1575-A'PT 1/8 .

- 2 10 - - 211 -
F 2021-1916 F 2021-1976

Unit: -mm

Unitmm

®
""---------', I ij

Fig_5 Open Deck End RoUer Type

Attached Table 6 Open Declt End Roller Type

Unit: nun
Vertical roller Base Sid e frame
Nominal
...
dia. D
'" l>: D3 a
. ... ...
, ,..
B B1 H, L
'" so ,
I
" "
"'.
e
,. ,..
n, L,
"
.. B
"
1lIO

....
100

=
110

""
l5<l

,..
53

.. ... ...
53 Z1XJ

.18
'u '00

110
""
T.O
'"
. ..., t OO 180
100

' 50 III

...
23'
160

21 0
TO

10' ..0
"0

=
I<

10

l5<l 150 zoo

"'" 110 00' 50 1>0 '50
" "0 nO 1<0 1'" 19

Vertical Toller b ush Horizontal roller , bearing and bush

..
Vertical spindl e
Nominal

'•" D. ..
Fig. 4 Open Deck End Roller Type
dia.

1lIO

....
d

'" . '"
50

ss
•
. ... ... .... '0
190

2lSO
..
'] t

as
so
eo
"0
41
",
53

sa to
<lz
9' .1

14 3. 2. .
.1
do
50

GO
""
"0

a",
t

to

t'
,..
11

eo 100 ao 50 143.2
l5<l 50 Sl ·
" 53 1090
'" 11

Nominal
dia. . '" '",..
Horizontal spindle b racket
P r
,."
l"loruonJ,'l'ndle Washer

do
'" P1 do
100

....
WI

175
90

...
100 lIOO
U>O

>t'
ea.e
sr.s
8 '1.6
"
III
.. . ,
'" ll30

1180
14

1&.5

ra
'0
'"
l50 11. " 00
"'"' 50 '00

Remork: The shape and dlmera lons of lbe hexagon head bolt @ sb3ll conform to lIS B 1180.

- 2 12 ­ - 213 ­
 JIS

F 2022-1990

l' 201 1. 197 6

Ships' Ho rizon tal Roll ers

Attached Table 7 Open Deck End Roll er Type

1. Scope
No. Co mpo nent Material
Th is Jap anese In dn st rial Stan dard specifies honzontal rollers used mautly for rop e guide of the winches for
1 Vertical rol ler ns G 5s0 1-FC 20 mooring ships.
2 Base Rematk; In this staodard unit! a nd num eri cal cl ues in ( ) are in acco rda nce with th e cc nveoocm t syst em
3 Side frame
ns G 3 ~Ol · S S 41 o r units, a nd given fo r referen ce o nly.

4 Ve rt ical spindle ns G 4051 -5 25 C 2. Construct ion, Shape and Dimensions

I
5 Ve rtical roUer bush IIS H srn -ac 6 The con struction, shape and dim ensions shall be as show n in Figs. I and 2 .
I
6 Hcrlzent ar ro ller JIS G 34 54-5TPG
7 Horiz on tal spind le b racket
I 3. Materials

~I
8 Hor izont al ~..p ind te 1IS G 3101 -5S 4 1 The ma terials o f ho rizontal rollers shall b e as given in Table:
9 Ho rizon tal roll er bearing
Tab le
10 Ho nz ont al roller bush I rrs H 5 11 1-BC 6
11 Set screw I JIS H 3423 -B<81'D or BsllF E No. Component I Material

12 Hortzcntal spindle lo cking ) Roll er

plat e Steel plate JI S G 3101-5S 41
2 Roller Fla nge plate
IJ Hexagon head bolt
I Steel bar
3 Axl e JIS G 310 1-5S 41 or
14 Grease nipple ns H 3422·B 'BMD 0 , B,BME JIS G 4051 -5 2S C
4 Roller bearing
IS Washer Steel plate
S Bearing seat 115 G 310 1-5S 41
16 Round head machine saey; JIS H 3422 ·B,BMD Or BsBME
6 Bum lIS H s ru-sc 6
Remark: Grease nipple shall co nfo rm 10 .IIS B 157s·A·PT 1/8. Brass rod
7 Set screw

8 Washer Bra.« plate

lIS G 3101-5 S 41 and
9 Stan d Jl S G 3452·SGP

10 Hexa go n head bolt and he xagon nut lIS G 3 101-5S 41

11 Grease nip ple Brass

Rema.rk: The material of roller may b e 115G 34S2-STPG 38 Or

lIS G 345 7-5TPY 41 lnsi ead of liS G 31OI ·SS 41

4 . Designation
The horiz ontal rollers shall be designat ed by th e t itl e , lIS num be r, nominal diamet er, bread th o f roUer ( L)
and height of roller (H) _
Example: Ship s' borizonLal roller D x L x H o r ns F 201 2 D x L x H

Re ference Standards :

JIS B 0202 - Parallel Pipe Threads

JIS B 02 03 - Taper Pipe Threads
JIS B 020 5 - Metr ic Coars e Screw Thread ,
JlS B 1 18 0 - Hexago n Head Bolt '
JlS B 1181 - Hexagon Nuts
JlS G 3101 - R olled Steel fo r General St ruc ture
l ]S G 3452 - Carb on Steel Pipes fo r Ordinary Piping
JIS G 345 7 - Axc Welded Carbon Steel Pipe s
JlS G 4051 - Carb on Steel for Machine Structural Use
JIS H 5111 - Bron ze Castings

- 214 ­ - 215 ­
F 2335·] 988 F 2335·1988

(2) The aluminium alloy door unit . If uot p ainted .sh all be surface-trea ted in accordance with ns H 8601­ Unih IlIlU

S·V I 4-R2 -R2.

7. Tests and Inspecti on

The t ests and inspecti on of the doo r shall conform to the following requirements. CuI lines
(1) Str ength Test Each completed door shall be laid ho rizontall y as shown in F ig. 4 and th e door shall mrn wide on each side
be banged by gravity fro m a position appro ximately 6Qo ope n upward. When the doo r has been thus (No blister or ruSt exce p t
fallen three times, there shall be foun d no defect in the door, fr ame , etc .
within these parts)

\
~\\ Test specimen

Fi g. 5

~
• _ .\ Frame (6) Surface Treatment Inspection Fo r the aluminium alloy door unit , the inspection for film thickness

r: u,...1l-­
__ ---'-'--­
- -­
---'
'0
--' j ! 'T,F
" "
IC Suppo rt

8.
and film mass shall be carried out in accordance with

Designation
ns
H 8680.

Th e do ors shall be designated by t he title, type, symbol , height of doorw ay and width of doorway. JIS
n umbe r may be used in place of the title.
Exam ple: Ship. ' Weather Hollow Doors SWROG He X We or ns F 2335 SWROG He X We
Fig. 4

(2) Appearance Inspec tion The surf ace shall be well finlshed and free fro m sueh defects as flaw, defor­
matio n etc.
(3) Operation Test The movable part s shall smoo thly operat e and shall produce uo ' noise due to
vibration .
(4) Painting Inspecti on The painted surface shall be uniform in gloss and colour and shall be free from
defects such as un eveirness of painting, drippin g, et c.
(S) Paint Film Inspection The Paint Film Inspecti on shall COUfOlTII to the following requirements .
<a) Specimen The test specimen shall be prep ared by applying th e specified surface treat ment
and pain ting in the same way as in the produ cti on pro cess on a st eel plate of 0 .6 to 0.8 rnm
thi ck , appro ximately 150 mm lon g and approximately 50 mm wide .
(b) Adhesion inspecti on (Crossed line inspection ) In " the coat on the t est specimeu eleven
p arallel lines of 1 mrn spacing shall be cut in two di rections perp endicular to each oth er with a
sharp knife as deep as to the steel plate surface , thu s makin g 100 squares of 1 rnm x I rom.
When a piece of con tact celophane film is att ached on th e coat and theu removed, the uumb er
of co at fragments peeled off shall be 5 Or less.
(c) Anti -corossion inspection A te st specimen shall be cu t with a sharp knife as deep as to the
st eel plate surface an d shall be left 100 hours nearly half-dipped in a 3% solution of NaCI (15
to 25° C) held in a beaker to a depth of about 70 rom. In the immersed state , the test specimen
shall show no blister on the surface except within the stri p 3 rom wide on each stde of the cut
lines, and also show n o rust in the same part wheu taken out of the solut ion , gently washed and
d ryed up. (Refer to Fig. 5.)

- 468­ - 469­
 lIS

F 240L-l 990
F 2401 -1990 F 2401-1990

Ships' Bron ze Side Scuttles

Refer ence Stan dards :

I. Scope JIS B 020 5 Me tric Coarse Screw Th read s

JIS F 2410 Tough ened Glasses for Ships' Side Scuttles
This Japan ese Industnal St anda rd specifies ships' bronze side scuttles (hereinaft er referred t o as " side lIS F 3905 Ships ' To ggle Pins
scut tles") , JISG 3101 Roll ed Steel for Gene ral Struc ture
JIS G 4303 Stainless Steel Bars
Remark : In this stan dard units and num erical value s in [ I are in accorda nce wit h the co nventiona l system JIS G 5101 Carbon Steel Castings
of units, and represe nt the required values. JIS G 5502 Spheroidal Grap hite Iron Castings
ITS G 5702 Blackh eart Malleabl e,Iron Casting s
lIS H 3250 Coppe r an d Co pper Alloy-Rods and Bars
2. Classification
J1SH5111 Bron ze Castings
lIS Z 220 1 Test Pieces for Te nsile Test for Metalli c Materials
This side scu ttles shall be classified as given in Tabl e 1 accor ding to classes an d typ es.

Corresponding International Standards:

Tabl e 1
ISO 1751 Ship buildi ng - Ship " side scut tles
hem Thieleness or tough ened glass (1) rom
Type and Type and Prcvisic u ISO 3902 Ship building and marine st ructures - Gaskets fo r rectangular win dows and side scuttles

~
200 250 300 350 ! 400 symbol of
glass hold er
symbo l of
deadllght
of VIsor
and symbo l
Relat ed Standard :
Class
lIS Z 2 24 1 ­ Meth od of Ten sile Test f or Metalli c Mat erials
12 15 15 - - Non -o~n ing
type )
A
Hinged typ e,
- 15 15 - - upward opening (U)
Hinged typ e -
(H )
10 12 U - - Non -openin g
ty pe (F)
B Hinged typ e,
LO 12 12 15 15 right -hand opening (R)
left -ban d opening (L)

10 10 10 12 12 ~';,-{)8i)nin g Hinged type

(H) or
C
Detachab le
10 10 10 12 12 Hinged typ e type (1')
With visor (IV)
D 10 10 10 10 10 Right-hand ope ning (R) or witho ut
No-dead -
ligh t t ype
(N)
E 8 8 8 LO 10 Left-hand op ening (L)

NOI. (1): Th e thickn ess of tou ghen ed ghss shall be ap plied to both clear and fro sted glass.

- 470 ­ - 471 ­
p 2401-1990 F 240f.1990

3. Construction , Shape and Dimensions 5. Toughened Glass

Th e cons tru ctio n, shape and dim ension s shall be as shown in F igs. I to 19 and confo rm to the foll owing Th e t ou ghen ed glass shall co nform 10 lIS F 2410.
require me nts:
(I) Th e sid e scu ttles Classes A, Band C shall be provided with locknuts as requ ired .
6. Tests and Inspection
(2) Th e side scut tles Classes A and B (exce pt non -ope nin g typ e) shall be provided wi th o ute r plu gs.
Th e side scuttles Class C (exce p t nou-openin g type) sh all, as a rule, be provided wit h ou ter plu gs as 6.1 Construction Inspecti on Th e con struc tion , shape and dimension s shall be inspected and shall con-
required. Oth er side scut tles may no t bc pro vided with out er plugs. Io rm 10 the requireme nts speci fied in 3 .
(3) The dir ecti ons of o pening of glass hold ers shall be as shown in Figure.
6 .2 Materials Inspection The materials shall be subjec ted to th e followin g inspect ion and shall satisfy aU
Left-hand opening (1) Right-hand opening (R) the requirements speeifled , However , these ite ms of in spection may be omi tted fo r the materials for side scu tt les
Classes D and E.
Tensile Inspe ction The test piece tak en as described be low shall be subject ed t o tensile insp ecti on an d
shall sat isfy the requirements given in Table 2. For m ain frame, glass holders and deadlights, take on e
test piece o u t o f each melt , provided wher e the number of castings made from the same melt is m ore
tJUlO 50 , take one test piece out o f every 50 castings o r a fract ion thereo f. f or hin ge pin s and swing
bolts, and outer plugs of side scuttle Class A, take one test piece (2) ou t of every 50 pieces or a fraction
thereof.
Note (2): T est pieces for bronze casting (Be 2), stee l cast ing (SC 42) . malleable iron casting (FCMB 28) and sphero idal
graphit e cast iron (FC D 4 5) shall conform 10 JIS Z 2201 . No.4 or No. 14 A.
Test pieces fo r copper and copper alloy rod an d bar (C 464 1 BE, C 464 1 BO. C 3771 BE, C 3771 BO) shaJJ
conform to JISZ 22 0 1·No. 4 or No.14 A, provided where the diam eter of mat erial is not ex ceeding 14 mm ,
th e djam et cr of test piece shaJJ be th e full m e of the bu. Test pieces for steel plate (SS 41 ) shall conform
to JIS Z 2 20 1-No: I A or No. ]4 B.

63 Hydraulic Inspection Eac h side scuttle not fitt ed with. de adlight and oute r plu g, shall be subjec ted
10 a hydraulic p ressure given in Tabl e 3 , where It mall withstand sho wing no sign ofleakage .

Tab le 3
F igure Direction of Opening
Class Hydr aulic -test pressure k Pa [kgf!cm 'j

(4) F or be tt er fi tting on the mil platin g, the back face of m ain frame flange may panly be gouged as far A andB 98 (I )
as it doe s not affect th e st rength. C 69 10.71
(5) Th e toggle pin shall be o f similar sha pe to th at speci fied innsF 3905 .
D 49 [0.5)
E 20 [0 .2 1
4. Materials

The ma terials shall be as given in Table 2 and F igs. 18 and 19.

7. Designation
Table 2 The side seu ttles sh all be designated by the titl e , ns num ber, class, nominal diameter (clear light size) , type
o f glass holder, direction of opening, the t yp e of deadlight (in the case of having n o deadlighr and viso r, the

Clas'
Main Jram e and
glassbo lee r
,
Dea dlight I Ou ter plug
Hinge pin, swing bo lt
and toggle pin Gasket
symb ol mowing th e dire cti on of ope ning of glass holde r is omitted), pre sence o f visor (sy mbo l W is added only to
those with visor) an d dimension H, o f spigot , using the symbo ls in parentheses and figures given in Tab le l. While
for Classes A, B and C wi th locknuts, symbol " /" shall be added at the end of the abo ve designation.
JlS H 5 IlI·BC 2 or Jl S H 3 2S0-C464 IBE
JlS number ma y be used in place of the title . .
A
ns G 5 101·SC 42 Or C4641BO
-
B llSHStll·BC6 Exampl es: Ships' bronze sid. scuttle A 300 FH or JlS F 240 1 A 300 FH
JIS G 5702·FCMB 28
- or JI S G S502·FCD45 .tIS H 325O-C377I BE
Age-re sistin g
rubber of high
Ships' bronz e side scuttle A 300 UH Or JIS F 240 t A 300 UH
Shtp, ' bron ze side $CU Itle B 300 LH or-nS F 2401 B 300 LH
C nSG H OI Or C3771 BD q uality
-S341 Ships' bronze side scu tue C 300 RHW IS l or JlS F 24 01 C 300 RHW 151
Slup s' bron ze side scuttle C 300 LP IS Or JlS F 240 1 C300 LP IS
0 Ship, ' bronze side scuttle C 300 FH IS Or JIS F 24 0 I C 300 F H IS
- JIS H sm- sc 6 -
E 8. Marking
8 .1 Main Frame Th e side scuttle shall be m ar ked in a conspicuo us place on th e main frame with hy­
Remark : Pans made o f iro n or 'ted shall be galvanized.
dr au lic test pressure , no minal dia mete r and manufa ctur er ' s name or ma rk .

8 .2 Glass Holder The glass holder shall be stam ped on a co nspicuous place with th e following lette rs :
" FOR TOUGHENED GLASS ONLY "

- 472­ - 473 ­
F 240 1-199 0 F 2401 -1990

Nominal diameter 250 and 300 Unit: mm

Unit : mm

E
B
~. ~ Section AOB

~N01Ch
C
Gaske t

for ke y
(2 in oppo site)

Nominal diameter 200 Section DO

Section CC
A
Remarks : I. Dimensi on H," shall be det ermin ed according to the thi ckn ess
of shell plating . -- .
2. Details of ,wing bolt 'IlaU be as shown in Fig>. 18 and 19 .

Fig.2 Side scuttle AFH

Fig. 1 Side scuttle AFH

-r 4 74 - - 4 75 ­
F 2401·1990 F 24 01·1990

Side scutt le AFH Unir: mm

Unit; mm

Nomi nal
Mrin frame
d ia.
D I D, D, I D, B
I c E G H u, I H 'I i K
I 7 I 7,
200 200 I 214 _:~J.':~ 152 ,I__
300 - 70 l3 35 _~_0_ I_l_8_ 50 8 13

2$0 2$0 F 278 ~I~ 247 ~ 358 80 16 '

1-
40 45
- ­ ,­ -
21 52 9 14

300 300 I 314 328 317 208 408 80 16 40 ~5 . 21 56 9 14

Unit: mm

Main frame
Nomi nal
dla. d d, d, d.
I I'
I k.
I T.
° I e,
200 18 36 16 32
! 12 25 8 44°
i 38°

'j
,.

2$0 20 40 19 38
.,
13 'li 9 37'50' ! 27°30'

300 20 40 19 38
I 13 'li 9 35°50'
I 27 ° 3~)I

Unit : m m

Nominal Main frame I Deadught

dia .
I T, I ,
0, 0.
I A
I D. J X 7, V
I w I h k n

- l ~ -252

~
200 - 25 42 16 15 22 23 25 9 10
- - f - ­ - -I - ­
250 2"2°20' 18040' . 26 304 26 48 18 16 82 25 25 27 10 12

300 24' 20' 18040'1 26 354 I 26 48 I1­ 18 16 84 25 ' 25 zt 10 12

Unit: mm
Sw1nl boh ~ wi11l. 1ocknuts Hing e pin f or
Nominal
Dndtigh t I . (0 1 deadhg bt
Scomn&001 1$ '01
mam Jrame dead light
T oughened
.hss
Refe enee
Calculated
db . 0, 0, I. NQm llU Num­
Iccr cwsuei h"f'oreads Length ber
I j~ fi~~rt o J Llia of Num-
ber
vor,tw't fueads bolt ho le
Dia, Length Di3..
Thick-
De"
mass
(kg )
200 - - I M 22 80 I 2 M 20
I 24 9
!-­
18 182 2] 2 ]2 ] 9. 88

2$0 22°20' 18°40' I M 24 90 I 3 M20 I 24 12 I 20 106

­ - -- - -
262 15 32, 20

300 24020'118050' I M 24 90
I 3 1'.1 20 I 24 121'20 110 312 15 39. 00

Fig, 2 (Continued)

Fig. 3 Side scuttle AUH

- 476 ­ - 477­
F 24 01·1990 F 24 01·1990

Unit: mm Unit: mrn

n:;~ A
II II

"'- Main fram

B B
~ Se-::tion AOB
C No tch for key

i-I
(2 to opposite ) \

;~~~;~-=-;~;::~~j;~~~l~:::~;~~:{
1116 Set screw B

Section CC
R emark s: I . Dirn'ensio n H 3 a shall be determined according to the
thickness o f shell plat ing.
2 . Details of swing bo ll shall be as shown in Fig>. 18 and 19 . Unit- mm
Mainframe
Nominal
dia. D, B
I c F
1 H, 1
G I H e a
1 8
I 8, Fig.5 Side scuttle BFH
250 290 182 380 39
I - -­
-1 16 23 1 45 _1_ 10 sao 35° 1 J 150

I
1-
300 340 208 425 38 16 25 48 11 ~I~ 13°30'
Unit: mm

N"ominal
Mamframe I Glass ho lder I toJ;~~O~~::,it.1
c I NomiO;t1
dia. 0,
I 0, I D D, I D, I D, 1
D, I h h,
I
:Iileof
screw tt>.r=4~

I -I­ !~
~I
250 13° 34' 250 14 M24
264 267 _I_ 294 -1- . 264
300 130 30' 1 :no
I 300 314 317 344 314 13 15 16 M24

Unit : mm

Nominal
S'w,ngbolu .. ~th l.ocf:­
nU~fOI!l.a l$ hokh: r """',ot"wd"o""'''''' ''''''''''1
' ''' ''~'.'o'' I Toughe ned glass ~
IQr.,., ~ lJllUJrle
Calculated
dla,
Length ·1NURlber NO~~aJ I Vmglh 1Nornoer N o~~naJ I b~llah~fe I Leugrh I Db.. ]nuckness! (i:t
250 80
I 2 M 24 90 3
_1_ M20 _I ~I--.!~ ' _~1_15 I~
300 80 2 M 24 -1­ M 20 24 11 312 15 52. 41
I 1
90 3
I

F ig. 4 Side scuttle AUH

- 478 - - 479 ­
F 2401 ·1990 F 2401 ·1990

UniL: IJlJ)\

Unit; mm

M6 50...! SCIe ~
c
Gasket
-----"-----I
/ Dea dJighl
<PTJ]
~
ffi
I
I I
I
4> X
:: ~

~~ -~ ,~ ------ --.:r ~ J---' - - --

-ljn ;: ff-~ --1~
~~
. ,-
-<:
'-
q. -T-
'-

it~
Unit : rnm
'r ~ L <PD, Pitc h 2 "lJ--V.
:i lor.: Gtassre- /,
0 0 iTJ ' ~ Nom inal Maln frarne

r- -- -- '---' '" - 1aining ring

i dia.
H, I K
I T I T, Z d d,
I d,
I d, e
1-=

~~ \ <J>. c;';;<i:et-
t-- ---- ------
I~ 200 16 40 6 10 35 16
_ _3_2 -1--1_4­ 28 10

)
I \ Main frame ,.
250
- --
18 44 7 . 11 43 18
-
36
3-6- 1-
16
- ­
32 12

E IT '1' D 300 18 50 7 11 43 16 16 32 12
B B

~
~
Section AOB Unit: mm
C Gasket .;.; Nominal Main fram e Deadligbt

t1 ~ dia.
I
~
k, 8 j A J
I
J J( J 200 23 400 14 \ 24 20
Notch for key (2 in opposite) -
-
250

300
25

25
400

40°
17

17 "I' 26
26
22

2S

Unit : rom
GIa" , ctain.jSwing bolts wit h Jock
Nominal De. dli:;hl mg ring Jlu \S for deadlight
dja .
X
I T , I T, I w I h I k: , I n T. Nominal
size
. ,~I __ 14_1~1_2_0 _
-~ '-I+
23

f
200 13_ 1_ _ 7 M 20
Section DD
Section CC
-
250

300
U
42 II li
15
I "15 22
- -22--1-
23
-23
- ­
25

25 7 . 9
7
6
M22

M22

Remarks : 1. Dimension H)" shall be determin ed accor ding to the thl ckeess

of shell pla ting . Unit : mm

2. Details cf swing bolt shall be as ,hown in Fig>. 18 an d 19.

I
Swing bolt with Jock., Securing bolts.for mainframe I Hinge pin for Toughened glass Reference
Nom inal not [0' dcad lip;ht ' deadfigh t Calculated
dia. I
Length Number I Nominal
l'IZ"
I
ilia. of Number
b olt h ole
Dia. I LeogtI1 Dia. Thickness
~
Fig. 6 Side scuttle BFH 200 75 2 M 16 19 9 eo 16 212 19. 33 10
- -- - - - - - -- -- - - -- - -- - -
250 85 2
I M20 2. 9 18 . 90
- - -- --
262 12 28.00
- - - - - -- - -
300 as 2 I M20 24 9 18 100 312 12 32. 58

Fig. 6 "(Continned)

- 480- - 481 ­
F 2401·199 0 F 2401-1990

For 350 LH Unit: mm Unit: mm

Swwg bolt for glass holoer

M6 Set screw
<l>D5

F
No Lch fo r ke y
(2 in oppo site)
Ga.sket

E
For 400 LH For 200 LH, 250 LHand 300 LH

Section COD
B

•.
",
" N
Lug for B 400

.
,.. -E.

For B 200, 250 and 300 For B 400

Section EE

Section FF

Fig. 7 Side scuttle B Fig. 8 Side scuttle B

- 482­ - 483­
 F 240 1·1990
F 2401·1 990
Side scu tt le B Unit vmm
For ZOO LH, 250 LH and 300 LH
Unit : mID
Main frame
Nominal
dia.
D, I BeE 1 F H I H, H, H, H, I K TIT l --z d c
2()0

250

300

350

400
Uni t : mm
Main fram e. Gl asshc lder
Nominal

A
dia.
d,
I d, d,
1
e I, x, I 8
1
8, D
1
D,

--
200
- --1I­ 32 14 I----=- 8 _1
1_ _ _ _1
23 25°
I 40° 200 214

250 36 16
~~ •
- - - - - ---_. zs
22°30) 45 · 250 264

_._ - -- _ ..
3110 36
_--- ~
1- -
.
16­
~ ~
32
- -_ . ~ - - 9- 9 25 22°30'
II 15· 300 314
Hinge for ZOO LP . Z50 LP .
300 LP and 350 LP
350
- - 400- ­ -
36
-40-1- -
16
- ­
--36--1
32 25 16°30' 26°30' 3')0
\_ 364_

~
19 10 27 17°30' 'I 27°3 0' 400 414
..
- ~ : ~
-- _-=. ...
Unit : mm ~ # . - - ~

Glass ho lder
Norrun al ,
dia. D, i D. D, I G 1 J X 1 T, I V I W C Q h h, I h, h,

200 217 240 1~ ~I~ I~_I ~_I ~I~ ~I _S_ _ 1_3_ 24 12 16

I
For 350 LH
250 267 292 ' 262 13 .1_ 22 ' 42 1') 72 22 13 6 14 26 14 18 C
- ~'~3423U -1-
3 25-:;2­ ! 1 5 - 7-2-----;-13""""-6-­ - 1-1­ 26 14 18

-+~I~~,~I~~I ~~~~+I~ : : _.::-

Unlti mm
.Glass retam-
Gh., hold er . mg nng D eadlight
Nominal -
d ia. I j
1 '" I a T, I A T,
I I,
1
h,
I k
1
t
I " «,
200 8_5 12
J....2.~ 48 45°
-I
7 24 H 10 21 23 i 6 3 -
250 9. 5 13 I 15 0

, 1
7 26 ]5 11 ~ __~' _ _7_ 9 -
300 95 13 I ') 18· , 8 26 15 11 23 25 7 9 -­
350 9.5 14
- -­
15
---
58°
-10­ - -
26
- -­
15
- - -
12
- -­
N
- -­
25
- -­
7
- - -- ­
9 56°
400 10. 5 14
1-
15 31· 10 28 16
- 13
- -­
25
- -­
27
- -­ - -­
10
~-
8 59°
Uni t : m m
S=~ ~~l~~:or SWing bol ts fo r
d eadligh t
I Securing bolts
(o r main frame
Hinge pins fo r glass- To ughened
Calculated
Nomina1 holder and deadligb t glass J11.8SS
('ppIDX.)
di a, Nom­ ' Nom-
ber N°s~al l ::1
~I~ be
Num­
Dia. Thi ck­
* * Lengt h
])la. (kg)
ber r o ess
200 M20x65 2 M20X80 I M16; 19 _ _8 _ !_ _1_
6_.I~ 212 10 19. 77
250 M22X 7S 2 M22X90 I ~12() I 24 _ 8_'_ _18_ 90 ­
1_ __ 262
I-­
12 29.66
300 M22X75 2 M22X 90 1 M20 24 8 18 102 312 12 35.90

~r- With visor 45. 98

-r­
350 M2l!X75 2 12 18 102 362 15
M22x90 : - , - Without 45. 37
visor

M24X IOOI-- 2- M22 Witt l Visor 60.64

400 M24 x 8IJ 3 12 , 20 106 412 15
With ou t
I viso r
59.8 .3
Rem ark : Dbuensio n j f, shall be det erm ined a cco rding to the t hick ness of shell pla ting.
'1i Nominal size x length
F ig. 8 (Continued)
- 485 ­
- 484 ­
F 2401·1 990 F 2401-1990

Unit : mm
For 400 LH
Unit : mm

c M6 Set SCI"'"
1 F

Swing bolt for

Not ch [~t k:; .7Cist -o f vi.$o r fitt ed oeadlight

tl~~~ bottom) Section

~
A~B . ' ~'

Hinge for 400 LP Gasket Section COD

F

Lu g for C 400

~
",. .
"' ''' .
~, -e l ~ "
Section EE

For C 400 For detachable deadlight

200 ,250 ,300 and 350
J

Fig. 10 Side scuttle C

Section FF Section COD

Section FF
Fig. II Side scuttle C

- 486 ­ -487 ­
F 2401 ·1990 F 2401-1990

Unit : mm
For 200 FH. 250 FH and 300 FR
Unit : mm Swing boll for deadlight
A

Section AOB
Hinge for detachable
deadlight
B

For 350 FH and 400 FH For detachable deadlight

Section CC

~
Sectio n AOB
Ga<l:et
' Z
I -
, 1-=

Section DD

B Fig. 13. Non-opening side scuttle CFH

Fig. 12 Non-opening side scuttle CFH

- 488­ - 489 -
 P 2401·1 990
F 2401-1990

Side scutt le C Side scuttle CFH

Uni t: rom
Unit mm

Main fram e Mililfume

Nomin al
dill.
D, B C E F n H'I H, H, H. K T
I T, I Z d
I

I d, d, d. t k,
Nominal
"dia,
D D, \ D, ID. I D.
I
B c I
I
1
z G I H 1 H, IH, \ H, I K I T I T, Z I d d, d,

I I

~I~
I~ ~t*- 2HI~ 1­
9 28 14 28 12

-*
IS, 4{) 6
234 147 I 290 .'0 I:18. 5 16
I 29 14
200 15,

20,
4{) 6 .9
I 2B H

~I. 14 2B
f--­
8 19 200 200 234 223 1'7 290 40
-
11
-1­
24

20,
- - - -I - - - - - ­
44 10 35 16 32
--
14
250 286 176 340 45 18: 5 18 26 16
l
14 6 10 3S 16 8 23 250 250 1~~6 2M 267 274 176 3~ 45 11 2. '19 16
25,
6

-
-~'--
25,
11 26 31 16 47 6 10 35 16 32 14
45
300 336 201 398 45 '19. S 18 26 16
30
42 47 6 10 35 16 32 14 28 8 23 300 300 3M ~
314 324 201
398
-
30
--
.- 1 -1 ­
50 7 11 43 I B 36 16
350 388 230 4~ 50 ~ 20 28 18 or 60 50 7 11 43 18 .36 32 388 364 367 375 230 456 50 13 30 35 18 or
- - - - - - f--­ - - - - I­ - - I­
16
- --- --
9 2S
--
350 350
--, - 1- - - - --I - - ­ - - - - - ­
400 4.18 255 506 SO 26 20 26 18 35 46 50 7 12 43 18 36 16 32 9 2S .wO 400 438 414 417 1 4 255 506
I
50 13 30 I 35 18 35 50 7 12 43 IB 36 16

I
Unit: mm
Unit ' mm
-
I~Uu.'
Deadllght
Main Irarne Glus bolder Deadligh t Main Irame
Nominal nat
dia.
! D,T~ ,I D. D,GilI
I h, I h,
Nominal
dia.
a, k, \ 8 " 8, T, T, I W h
Wi '
24 *9I
8 8, D X T, V 9 h i, j m a T. A T. j
"
21~ 21~ 23l ~~ 12
19

~ "1"
22 20 32 12 13 18 19
200 ~o .w' 20e 58 18 \11 S 12 22 13 45' 7 22 13 10 200
0

21 11 _ _ _+--~ 19 [ 25 1_40' - -1- ---1 - -1---1-­ -+- -1---\-­ -1-­

250 f.!20 30' 45' 2SO 2,641267' 290 26\ 11 22 38 13 66 20 1 12 5 13 24 16 . 13 14 48' 7 10 250 28 10 10 23 22°30' 45° 24 22 38 13 14 20 21 23 6

~ ~ '-;;:;; ,,,"-~ ~ ' ~_1_3_~ ,~ ~_6 _

12 24 14
1­ I-­ 1 -1 !­

~~~~~
300 122'30' 45° 300 314 317 340 312 11 ~3 . 5 38 13 66 20 1--; 5 13 24 8 24 H 10 ----"'-_ • \ " n 20
- - - - -,-- - - ­ 1­
350 8°30 ' 26°30' 350 36-1 367 39° 362j 13 ~ 42 I S 72 22 13 ; 6 14 26 14 13 H ilS 580 10 26 IS 12 350 32 11 11 25 18030" 26°30 ' 26 25 42 15 IS 22 24 25 ~
400 17°30' 1n ' 30' 400 41
1­ ,-­
41 442 41 13 '25 F 15 72
1
-'
22 113l ' 6 14 26 14 1 18 iHT15 1' ~10 10 26 IS
f--­
12
400
32 I
I
12
I
12 25 17' 30' 27°30' --;-+-~-- 42 I IS 1 15 22 2~ 2S I 7

Unit: nun.

pin for TOggle P

Uni t · mm
~epmlTo ggi epm I
W
Swing bo lt' Swing bolt ' Hing e Swmg bo lts Swing bolts Tough ened glass
Deadlight Swing b oll. fe r Toughe ned gl3ss (or [fer detach.
glass holder for deadlight for main frame gloss holder for detach, {or dea.dlight Ior main flam e de.d.i.ht hie deadliah t
Nominal and deadllght able deadli
dia.
a,
Nominal
~~ NOminal l' NOmi ·IVja. E
DU . ~n~~
Nominal 1..,. No nu- I Nu m ut· . ~
Di,II ~.:I Du.1
h· 1r I
'Thickness
size x ~ a n.al ~~ It : :l 0 size x 1 ~, \llJl nal ~llt Dia. 1
k • n
len gth Z .o
size x
length :Z.o SlU ("IIeZ.o
Iha . Len gth Thickness
length bee : size M le her .:I

l
200 19 5 1 7 - M16 x 55 2' M16x70 I M12 15 14 83 14 80 212 10 M 16 x 60 I M12 [ 15 8
200
- - I-
250 21 5 23 6 8 - M 20 x 65 2 M20 xBO I MI6 19 8 16 91 16 90 262 10 250
"-- ­ ' - 10
300 21 5 23 6 8 - M 20 x65 2 M20 x 80 1 ~n 6 19 8 16 97 16 9S 312 10 16 97 16

, -
350 2~ 6 2S 7 9 58° fl.112 X75 2 M12x90 2 M.:..'O 24 12 18 103 18 100 362 12 M 22 XBO 2 M20 24 12 is 103 18
1--\--\--1­ -1 ­ ---+- -+
400 2~ 6 25 7 9 59° M22 x 75 3 M12 X90 2 M20 24 12 13 103 18 100 412 12 M 22 x80 2 M20 24 1 12 1 18 103

Remarlc.s: 1. In the case o f deta chable deadllght the dimension " d' shall be In creased by 0 .5 mm for eac h nominal diameter . In the case o f detachable deadljght the dimension Old '· shan be Increased by 0 .5 mm for each nom.i.oal diameter .
Remarks: 1­
2. Dimension H , sb3..0 be det ermined according to the thi ckn ess o f shell plating . Dimension H, shall he determined according to th e thickn ess of shell plating .
2.

Fig. 13 (Continued)
Fig. J 3 (Continued )

- 490 - - 491 -
F 2401-1990 F 2401-l990

For 200 LN, 250 LN and 300 LN For 400 LN

Unit : rnrn
Un tt t rnm

A--~ml-+tt

For D 350 LN, E 350 LN and 400 LN

Fig. 15 Side scuttle D

Fig. 14 Side scuttles D and E

- 492 - - 493­
F HOI·19 90 F 2 401-1990

Unit :mm Side scuttle D

Unit : mm

Mainf'ame
Nominal
dia.
-­
D, B C I': F H H, H, IH'I K T T, Z d d, d, d, e <,

200 234 147 290 4<1 18.5 15 22 14 ~o 6 8 28 14 28 12 24 7 19

M6 Set screw
Gl.m holder -­ - - -- ­ - - ­ - - - - ­,­ - - - ­
Hinge pin 250 286 176 348 45 18. 5 17 24 16 10
44 6 9 35 16 32 14 28 8 23
-­ - - - ­ -----­ -­ ­ - - - - ­ - -
-~

300 336 201 398 45 19. 5 17 24 16 01 47 6 9 35 16 32 14 28 8 23

- - - - - - -­ IS
- - -­-­-­ -­ - -
350 388 226 448 45 22 18 26 16 47 6 10 35 16 32 14 28 8 23
-­ - ­ - ­ - ­ - ­ - - - ­- ­ - -­ - - - - -
400 438 251 498 45 23 18 24 16 ~-6-1~ 35 16 32 14 28 8 23

U nit: mm

8 Main Irame Glass h older

Willi vi SOT Nominal
Section AOB dia .
8 8, n D, IJD,
I D, G X I T, I V I I IV
c 9 h Ill , h, h,

~1~ _8_~
- - , - - -- ­--­ _I_I_I~ ~I.~
~t
200 2$° 40° 200 214 217 238 32
For D 400 I '

~"
a 250 22°30' 45° 250 264 267 290 38 13 1 66 20 12 5 13 1 23 10 16
--,­ -- - - - -----­ ---­ -­-­
~ ~ ~I ~
300 22°30' 45° 300 314 317 340 II 23.5 38 13 66 20 12 5
- - ; ­ - - ,- -

lb
--­ - - -
350 18°30' 2603 0' 350 364 367 I 392 33 13 66 20 1 12 5 13 24 1 11
I
1 16

400 li oaO' 2]°30' 400 414 417 442 11 i 23. 5 38 13 66 20 i 12 5 13 24T 11 1---;
Secti on EE Unit : nun

Nominal
Glass holder r,b
retainin
~,
.. g
Swing bol t , for
gtassholder
I
:
~""\1riJ;'8 ~ol l'
tor roam !I 3JTle
Hinge pin
glass ho lder
fOj Toughened glass

dia. 1 T. I
Nomin al Num- :Nomi-IDia, Num- 01 I
Dia. Thickn ess
For D 200, 250, 300 and 350
j
I
k ".
I " ~e~ bcr i ~e ~ ~~~ ber Dia. \Lengt
I
For £2 00,250, 300,350 and 400 For D 400
I I( J
200 3 19 13 : 45· 7 M16x 5$ 2 MI 2 15 3 14 83 212
I 10

" I
250 5 23 14 48· 7 M20 x 65 2 MI6 19 8 16 91 262 10

.
Bll ..,,1 300 5 23 14 48° I ~ M20 x 65 2 M16 19 8 16 97 312 10
-I
- " 'n 1 - , -,-­ - I
-----1 --­t,---­r­ ~I
1 ....

350 6 23 14 S8° I9 M 20 X 2 M16 19 12 16 97 362 10

~ l 400 6
1- ­
I 23 14 31° --9-~I'-3- 1:~I--;-i~l- 16 97 412 10

Rem:u.Jc :
- -
Dimension H, shallbe d etermin ed according 10 the thickness of shell plating .
Section FF
Fig. 16 (Continued)

Fig . 16 Side scuttles D and E

- 494 ~ - 49 5 -
 I' 240 1-1990
I' 240 1-1990

For stee l bar For steel plate Unit : nun

Side scuttle E
Unit: m.m

Main frame
Nominal
dia .
D, B C E F H H, H, H, K T T, Z
I d I d, s, d, c t,

- ~.~ J~ -
200 234 146 288 40 20 14 40 5 7· 24 6 19
281 14 128112
-­- - -­
-;;-~I----;- - 1-2­
~~
~
250 286 172 15 15 22 14 40 5 8 19
10
- 1­ - --­ :- - - ­-l­
24 I ~
or
300 336 197 388 42 16 15 22 14 44 5 8 28 14 28 12 19
15 1-
1- --1
350 388 226 446 i 45 19 17 24 16 47 6 9 35 28
16 7 32 14 23
SIde scuttle A Side scuttle B
Unit: mm

400 438 251 496 45 20 17 2~ 16 47 6 9 3 5 1- ; ~ -I 32 14 28 7 23

Nomllul
d ia,
D id I b I I Ii I It . \ D h, I t b, t.
I t

200 45 10
UIPl: mm
250 288 50 12 10
Main frame Gw , holde r
Nominal

~ I n, I D,
di.a.
n n, G
I J
I
X T, V Iw c p
I It h, I II , h,
300

~
350
200 25' 40' 200 238 9 20 32 11 58 13 10 4 11 20 7 13
- I - - ._­
250 22"30' 4$(1 250 '"264 267 290 9 20 32 12 58 18 11
,
4 12 - 21 8 14

11 21 8 1---;:­

"'I'"
300 22°30' 45' 300 314 317 340 9 22 32 12 58 18 4 12 Unit: mm
--
~.+, I~ I -~
f--­
350 18 030
' 11 23.5 38 13 60 20 III 5 T12 23 10 16
NomUul
Side scutt les C and D
:
d", .
I I I I I n \ I I h I h,
I I I
I­
400 17° 30' 27°30' 400 414 417 442 11 23.5 38 13 60 20 11 I I 5
12 23 10 16
200
D

232
d b I Ii Ii, t b, I, d b I

Unit ~ m.m 250 284

GLus hold er I G~I'C'L nnJDjr

Swing bo lrs fo r
glass holder
Securingbous for Hinge pin for
glau holder
Th oughened glass
300 334
No minal .. n" main frame
I No minal ! Num- Nomi­ !Di a. ofl Num­
~I
di a.
I II
T
j
I k m a
, j ;:';;' Ibet ~~e i ~b~~ b~r
Dia. Length Thickne ss
350 386

200 3 19 13 45' 7 M16 x ss 2 M12 15

J- I
__ 3 _ _. 14 83 212 8 soo 436
.-
2SO 4 19
-­
13 48°
I
7 I M16 x 55 2 I M12 15 I
I
8
I
14 83 262 8 Rem ark : Outer plUgs $hall be galvanized.

300 4 19 480 8 I M16 x 55 2 M I2 15 8

i 14 91 312 8
13
I

~
Fig. 17 Outer plug
3~0 5 23 14 580 [ 9 M1JlX65 I 2 M16 19 12 16 362 10

400 5 23 14 59' i 9 M 20 x 65 I 2 MI G 19 ~[-16- 97 412 10

Remarks Dimension H J shill be determ ined acco rding to the thickn ess of shell plating .

fig . 16 (Continued)

- 496 - - 497 -
F 2401-1 990 F 24 01 ·1990

Unit : mm
Unit: nun

(j)
I
,.... _ = C'"t=::L..- L. . -, 4­
1_ . _ _ . . _ _ . ..J

.)
'.r. I
Unit : mrn

No minal size - ..
Boll I Ring nu l ~~ppe~J ~
I I IS I a I b ID,ID,IH11i{, D .
~

for swin g bo lt
d I D D,IB IH L -A d, h. I d~
M16 M16 1 16 1 24 18. 5 13 55, 60, 70 9 40 68 11 7 32 25 13 34 22 9 5 12
- - - - - - - - - - - -
M 20
M 20 i 20
2B 22 5 15
-
65, 70, 75, BO 10 4B 78
- -
12
-
8
-
3B 30 16 37
- - -
26 10
_
5
1_­
14 3
M22 M 22
, 23 32 24. 5 17 75, 80, 85, 90 II 55 B4 13 9 42 -;1-; 39 30 12 6 16

MU M 24- 1' 25 38 26.5 20 30. 90, lOO 13 55 90 14 10 43 -:-1--; 42 3~ l4 7 19 Unit i mm

Lo cknut Spanner
Remarks; 1. Screw threads.. on d shall co nform to lIS B 0205. Nominalsize I
2. Swin;: bolt sh all be designa ted by no minal size x L.
Exa mp le : Swin g bolt M 20 x 70
for swing,bolt d
I J)
I D, I Ii a b
I c Do I D, I D, H b, I c, I c,
M I6 MI6 25 32 13 5 65 3 24 34 44 60 ! 3 2.5 5
- - -­ - - - ­ - ­ - - -->.-­ - - - ­
Material M 20 M20 30 38 19 5 6 5 3 28 40 52 64 8 2.5 5
No . Com po nen t
Side sc ut tle A Side scutt les B and C I Side scuttles D and E -­ - - - - -­ - ­ - - ­ - - - ­ - -­ - ­
M22 M 22 35 42 22 6 8 3. 5 32 44 60 72 10 3 6
i ns fl3 2SI}-C4641 BE JI S fl 32S0-e377 1BE
Bo ll - - - - - ­- -
--;-~
or C464 I BD or C3771 BD -­ - - -­
MU M24 40 4B 22 6 3 3.5 36 75 10 3 6
2 Ring nut n S fl51 11-IlC 2 I JI S fl 5 111-BC 6
Remarks; 1. Screw threads o n d shall conform to JIS B 0205.
3 Sto pper
JIS H 3251}-C464IBE ns H 32SI}-C377 1BE 2. Stee l part shall be galvanized,
oK:4641 BD or C377 11lD
4 Pin

.11 5 H 3251}-C3771 BE, C377 1BD or JI S G 4303-SUS30 4 No . Component Materm

5 Set screw
1 Lo cknut
ns H SIll-Be 2 or BC 6 ,JIS H 3250-e 4 64 1 BE or C 4641 BD,
or JIS H 3250-e 325 0-e 377 1 BE or C 3771 BD
-­ - -
Fig. 18 Swing boll 2 Spanner
ns G 3101-S S 41
3 Key

Fig, 19 Lo cknut and spanner

- 498­ - 499 ­
 I' 2401·1990 1'2401-1990

Ref erence Rem arks: 1. Sills of side scuttles shill not be located below the line drawn parallel to the fr eeb oard declo at side and having its
lo west, poin t at a height equal Lo 0 .0 25 lime the bre3.dth of tile ship Or 500 nun , whichever is the greater, above
th e deep est load line.
2. The term "protected op ening" defJnes an opening which satisfies at lea .sr the foll o wing req uirements .
Applica tio n Table of Side Scut tles
Ste el coaming
Kind of opening he igh t Easing Door Covering

1. Thi s Application Table of Side Scut tles has been prepar ed for use in ships with plying limi ts of ocean going Of strong constr uctio n, ca pable
. or greater coa sting service. Com pan ionw ay
Of st rong
const ruction oibcing closed and flxed from
both inside and o utside
-
2. The side scuttle s for fishing boa ts sh all be in accordance with the Standard fo r the Co nst ruc tion of Stee l
Machinery
229 10m Of steel
orsteel cc nsuucrion, capable
Fishi ng Vessels pub lished by the Fishin g Boat Associati on o f Ja pan . of being closed end fixed from -
space opening eonstruc uon both inside and outside

Stee l ha tchcover (non-

3. This applicat ion table con fo rms t o the followin g rules and regulations :
Hatchway - - wat ertight) Or wood hatch ­
(1) Regulations for the Const ruction o f Stee l Ships ,

Regulations for Load Lines,

I cov er, provided wrth o ne

laye r tarpaulin

Regulatioos for Sh ips' Subd ivisions .

(2) Ru les an d Regulations for the Con stru ction and Classification of Ships pub lished by Nip pon Kai jl 3. In passenge r ships engaged o n interna tional voyage s side_scuttles sha ll be of no n-open ing Or o f locked type
Kyokai, accor ding to the pos itions where they are Fitted as de scribed belo w. However, the req uirement s may suitably be
(3) The Internat ional Convention for the Safet y of Life at Sea, 1960 (SOLAS) and the Inte rnatio nal conside red for passenger ships engaged on short internatio nal voy age s. (Regulations f or Ships' Snbd lvts'ons,
Conventio n on Load Lines, 1966 (196 6 - lLLC). Art . 58)
(1) If the sill of any side scuttle in a tween-deck region is lo cated be low-the-line drawn parallel to the bulk­
head deck at sid e and havin g its lo w est point at a heigh t equal to 2 5/ 1 000 of the breadth or the ship abov e
4. As they are not det1nitely specified in the foregoing r ules and regulations, the appli ca tions of D and E
the dee pest load line , all the side scumes in [his region shall be of non-opening type .
Class side scut tles show n in Table are st andard exam ples, Therefore ot her choi ce suitable for th e position in
(2) AU the side scut tles who se sills are lo cated below the margin hn e , excep t the side scuttles ment ioned above,
que stion may be made fro m a design viewpoint. shall be of locke d type .

Table

Deckhouse
0
0 ~~ ~~~ Enclosed On freebo ard dec k (firs tier)

=_c _..
' :;; .::: ~ Enclosed
".~~ l~
:l'~
Not C( l) ..Vl ~ ";I
2',.2j:;
super­
super -
struc ture
structure (~and
Havingrnslde
unprote cted
~ ~ I ba'>'\", , ~~~ W'>~~1~~ 'OPCIWlG'
t a l b _ op.' _ 'balo"' fl~~ oo:I;
On super_ On super-
stru ctu re
deck
struct u re
::: ~ £frnlier) lier) cpenlegs deck (third
i .-= ­0
'<: ~
"'.0 .0
Q
the space
\0
~,(>I 'bHM"%1'o) 1
{seco nd
tier an d
u,
below free­ 0 "",,",, _ '" tier)
w .... oIlip·s _above)
board deck u.tr" ," f"a ~ o. 'bl ~

Front 0 C 0
wall
C 0 E
~ -
.s NCler)
:J Side
A B C. 0 C C I) F. E
8 waD
~

; f--­
. t;
After
E
1'10 1« ' )

0 0 D E E
will

Side scu ttles to be fi tted in a position whe re watertightness and/or airtightness are specially required

shall be of au. A.

Side souttles to be fitted on the after wall of the deekhouse of Type A ship (International Conventi on

on Load Lines, Regulation 27) enclo sing machin ery spaee opening> ' hill be of Class C.

Side scuttles 10 be luted in a position which is sheltered by any such structure on the deck sideas C3D.

mitigate wave impact may be of Oass D. .

- 500 ­ - 501 ­
 lIS
I' 2404 ·197 5
I' 2404 ·1975 F2404-1 975

Ship s' Non-opening Side Scuttles Nominal size: 150 and 200 Nominal size: 250 and 300

1. Seope
This J apanese Industrial Standard specifies ships' n on-opening side scut tles fi tte d to dets, doo rs, e tc.
doors , etc .

2. Classification
Th e scu ttles shall be classified as given in Tab le:

T able

Type Maten al of frame Glass Guard bar

(Symbol) (Sym bol) (Sym bol)
FC I S (F)
A YBsCl (C) Fitted (G)
A C7A-P(A) Nol fitt ed
Tough en ed glass
B Steel plat e
Wired gI= (W)
Brass plate (1')
C Y& C l (C) No t fi lted
AC7A-F CA)

3. Construction, Shape , Dimens ions and Materials

The construc tion, shape, dimensions and m aterials sh.all be as sh own in Figs. I to 3.

4. Glass
The glass pane shall be o f toughened glass or wired glass.

5. Designati on
The side scuttles shall be designate d by the title, type , nomin al size and the sym bol fo r frame mate rial, kind No. Component Materi3.1
of glass and th e sym bol for guard bars.lIS numbe r may be used in place o f the title . ns G SSOI · JIS HS101· ns H 520 2­
I Frame FC 15 YBsC I AC 7A·F

Exampl e: Sh;p, ' Non-openmg Srde Scuttl es. Type A. 150 FWG Or JIS P 2404 . A I SO FWG. 2 Bolt m d hexag on an t Steel bar BlUSbar St eel bar
JIS R 32 06-Tempered glass or
3 GI.an JIS R 3204-W" ed SWS
ns H404~
4 GU3[d bar Steel bar Bras> bar A 505 2 BO or
A 505 2 BE

Reference Standards:
JIS B 0205 - Metri CCoarse Screw Threads
JIS B 1135 - Slolled Head Wood Screws Fig. 1. Typ e A
JIS B 1181 - Hex agon Nuts
JlS G 5501 - Grey Iron Castin gs
JIS H 4040 - Aluminium and Alumin ium Alloy Rods , Bars and Wires
JIS H 5101 - Brass Castings
118H 5202 - Alumin ium Alloy Castings
JIS H 86 0 1 ­ Anodic Oxidat ion Coatin gs on Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys
J1S R 3204 ­ Wired Glass
JlS R 3206 - Tempered Glass

- 502 - - 503 -
f 14 04·l975 f 24()4.1975

Nominal size: 150 and 200 Nominal sae: 2 50 and 300

Uni1: mm
Unit: mm
Glass No. o f
Dill. of r d bar' l
Nomin al boll> No. of
D D, D, t Ii and 1)1. guard P P,
size
Dia. I Thick-
ness
• hexagon Steel
r nuts
Brass
A 5 052 BD
or
ban

! <\ 5052 BE ·
150 162 i 8 (6 .8) 150 230 200 5 6 I 6 9 8 55 2 - -
200 212 I 8 (6.8) 200 280 250 5 6 6 9 8 75 2 - -
--.
250 262 I 8 (6.8) 250 330 300 6 7 8 9 10 65 3 125 90
300 312 I 8 (6 .8) 300 380 350 6 7 8 9 12 75 3 140 105

Remark s: 1- Chain line, show guard bars where fi lled.

2- Dimen sion s in parentheses arc for wired glass panes.
3. Screw threads on the bo lt shall co nform to JIS B 0205 , and the shape o f bolt head be

co untersunk o r snap head.

4. Bolts and hex agon nuts made from steet bar shall be gebanized .
s. Every part made of ahnn iruurn alloy "hall. af ter macturung , be surface-treated to llS H 860 1, wherein

the grade and class shill, as a rule. be 5-9 . K2-R2.

6. Hexagon nuts shall co nfo rm 10 JlS B 1181.

7. The sur face of alumin ium alloy PMt!> that will co me 1J\ co ntact 'With steel part s shall be protected

(rom etec tr olytrc corros ion by suitable meth o ds,

Pig. 1 (Continued)

/01/0 -2

No. Component Material

1 f IBIlle Steel plate

.~

2 -Bolt and hexa gon -nu t St eel bar

-3 OlasS
ns R 3206·Temp ered gl ass or
ns R 3204 ·Wued glass
4 Guard bar Steel bar

Unit: mrn

,I
Olasl; No . of
bolt, Dla, of
Nom in al guard No. of
size D D, D, I and guard L r,
Dia, Thi ck­
ness hexagon bars
ban
d
nu t>
15 0 16 2 8 (6 .8) ISO 230 200 3.2 6 9 2 55 - -
200 212 8 (6_8) 200 280 250 3.2 6 9 2 75 - -
250 'i 6 2 8 (6.8) 250 330 300 3.2 8 9 3 65 125 90
300 312 8(6.8) 300 3 80 350 3.2 8 9 3 75 14 0 105

1. Chain lin.. show guat d ban where fitted.

2. Dimensions in parenth eses are for wired gla>spone ..
• . Screw thr eads on th e bolts shall confo rm to 115 B 02 05, and the sha pe of bolt h ead
b. scap head,
4. frame, bolts and hexag on 1\1lto ,hall be galvanized.­
S_ Hexagon nuts shall conform to ns B 1181.
Fig. 2. TypeB
- 504- - 505­
 J1S

F 2406-1 976
F 2404-1975
Unit : rom

Deck Lights

1. Scope
This Japanese Industrial Standard specifies deck lights for ship use.

2. Classification
Deck lights sh.a1I be classified into two ty pes A and B.

3. Construction, Shape , Dimensions and MAterials

The construction, shape , dimensi on and material s shall be as sho wn in Figs. I and 2.

4. Designation
Deck lights shall be designated by the t itle and type . JIS number may be used in place of tlte title.
Example: Deck Llgjn Type A or JIS F 2406 A.

Plate frame Casting fram e

33 CD-.. . ."­
--B~Jl~
@ ---.',...--+b.,.,..-........ll
~~~ I

1. \J'Ulty or \ 'pske~
L _ .-----1 2
Section AA

No. Compon ent Materi.l.l

Bra ss plate,ns H 5101-YBsC I

1 Frame or ns H 5202-AC 7 A-F •.

2 Countersu nk head wood screw ; Brass wile

ns R 3206-Tempered gLts& or
3 Glass _ ns R 3204-Wired glass -­ - .-

Unit: mm

No . of
Cia", countersank
Nommal D D, D, r
size head wood
Diameter Thickne ss screw

150 162 8 (6.8) ISO 2 16 190 5 6

200 212 8 (6.8) 200 266 240 5 6
250 262 8 (6 .8) 250 316 290 5 8
300 312 8 (6 .8) 300 366 340 6 8

Remarks: 1. This figure shows the seuttle 250 rnrn or above in nominal diameter,
2. Dimensions in parentheses are fOI wired glass panes.
3. Count ersunk heac wood screw shall conform to JI5 B 1135.
4. Every part made o f aluminium alloy shall, after machining , be SWraD!­
treat ed according to JlS H 860 1, wherein lhe grade and class shill, as a rule, Reference Standards:
be 5·9 • K2·R2.
l IS B 1135 - Slotted Head Wood Screws
Fig. 3. Type C
lIS B 1181 - Hex.agon Nuts

- 506­ - 507­